牛津版高一英语上册Unit1练习2牛津英语

牛津版模块三Unit 1　The world of our senses 1st Period　Welcome to the unit 双基提要 1. Words: sense, affect, fail, confuse, achieve 2. Phrases: daily life, one another, sign language, sense of taste 课堂反馈 一、根据首字母提示，补全下列句中单词。　 1. The new tax law doesn’t a__________ me because I’m a student. 2. ---How did Chris do in his driving test? ---He f__________. 3. I like Pam --- she has a really good s_________ of humour . 4. The reason why I a________ good results is that I work hard, and so could you. 5. I always c_________ you with your sister --- you look so alike. 二、你能翻译下列歌词吗？翻译时注意押韵，相信你能行！ My Five Senses I am somebody! I am able to see with my eyes. I see the frog jumping. I am able to hear with my ears. I hear the bird singing. I am able to smell with my nose. The roses smell good. I am able to taste with my tongue. The candy tastes sweet. I am able to touch with my hands. The ice feels cold. Whatever I do, I use my five senses. 巩固练习 一、根据首字母提示，补全下列对话。 Our five Senses HOST: Hello. Today we’re here with Kate and Nick. Hi, Kate. Hello, Nick. KATE AND NICK: Hello! HOST: Our five senses are sight, smell, taste, touch, and hearing. Kate, what can you see with your eyes? N_______(1) some things. KATE: Lots of things. I can see flowers, cars, books, animals, and my cat. HOST: Okay… how does your cat l________(2)? KATE: Well, she is small. And she’s brown and white. HOST: And how does your cat f________(3)? KATE: She feels soft. She has very soft fur. HOST: Nick, what can you h_________(4) with your ears? NICK: I can hear music and TV and animals, too. HOST: How does music s________(5)? NICK: I listen to rock music. And it’s really loud. HOST: Nick, can you describe ice cream? NICK: It f_______(6) cold and smooth. And it t_________(7) sweet. HOST: Kate, how do your favorite things s__________(8)? KATE: Perfume smells sweet. Pizza smells delicious. And flowers smell wonderful! HOST: Yeah, pizza does smell delicious and it tastes delicious, too! I’m h________(9)! 　　　Can you describe your favorite things? Today’s Backpack show was fun! I’m glad you were here. Have fun with your five s_________(10) and see you next time! 二、阅读理解 A There is one common language in every country in the world. All the people, old and young, men and women, must use it. It’s everybody’s second language. It’s easy to understand, although you don’t hear it. It’s sign language. When you wave to a friend, you are using sign language. When you smile at someone, you mean to be friendly. When you raise your hand in class, you are saying, “Please ask me. I know the answer.” When you put one finger in front of your mouth, you mean “quiet”. The deaf use sign language to talk with each other. There is even a university for the deaf in the United States. There are also TV programs for deaf people. They use sign language to tell everything.   A）仔细阅读短文，在下列句子前标上T（对）或F（错）。 (　 ) 1. Sign language is a common language in the word.　 (　　) 2. When you smile at someone, you mean to be friendly. ( 　 ) 3. We can hear this language. (　 ) 4. There are no TV programs for the deaf people.   B) 根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。 (　 ) 5. Deaf people often _______ when they talk with each other. A. raise their hands　　　　　　　　　 B. smile at the other　　 C. use sigh language　　　　　　　 D. put one finger before their mouths (　 ) 6. ________ must use sign language. A. Young people　　　B. Old people　　 C. Children　　　 D. All people (　 ) 7. If you put one finger in front of your mouth, it means _________. A. “quick”　　　　　　 B. “quiet”　　　C. “happy”　　　D. “hungry” (　 ) 8. If you want to answer the teacher’s question, you should ________. A. put on your shoes　　　　　　　　　 B. put away your books C. put up your hand　　　　　　　　　　D. put down your hand   B 　　For many years, no one could communicate with people who had been born without hearing. These deaf people were not able to use a spoken language. 　　But, beginning in the 1700s, the deaf were taught a special language. Using this language, they could share thoughts and ideas with others. The language they used was a language without sound. It was a sign language. 　　How did this sign language work? The deaf were taught to make certain movements using their hands, faces, and bodies. These movements stood for things and ideas. People might move their forefingers across their lips. This meant, “you are not telling the truth.” They might tap their chins (下巴) with three fingers. This meant “my uncle.” The deaf were also taught to use a finger alphabet. They used their fingers to make the letters of the alphabet. In this way, they spelled out words. Some deaf people could spell out words at a speed of 130 words per minute. Sign language and finger spelling are not used as much as they once were. Today, the deaf are taught to understand others by watching their lips. They are also taught how to speak. (　 ) 9. Why were people unable to communicate with the deaf people many years ago? 　　　 A. Because the deaf people couldn’t hear. 　　　 B. Because they were taught to use a finger alphabet. 　　　 C. Because they couldn’t use a spoken language. 　　　 D. Because they could only spell several letters. (　 )10. What does the phrase “stand for” in the third paragraph mean? 　　　 A. 站立　　　　　 B. 坐落　　　　　　　C. 忍受　　　　　 D. 代表 (　 )11. What’s the best title for this passage? 　　　 A. Sign Language　　　　　　　　　 B. Deaf People　　　 C. A Special Language　　　　　　　　　D. A Finger Alphabet C June 27, 2000, is the 120th anniversary of the birth of Helen Keller, and each year the week in which her birthday falls is recognized as Deaf-Blind Awareness Week. In honor of Helen Keller --- and other members of the deaf-blind community, this week is dedicated to the deaf-blind. Every year the last week of June is devoted to one thing---recognition of the deaf-blind people in our midst. While the purpose of Deaf-Blind Awareness Week is to pay homage to Helen Keller, the deaf-blind woman who was born that week, the week focuses on increasing public awareness and understanding of deaf-blindness. According to the Helen Keller National Center (HKNC), about 70,000 people have hearing and vision loss. More than a decade ago, Deaf-Blind Awareness Week became an event officially recognized by the Federal government. The story of Helen Keller is well known. Born on June 27, 1880, the healthy infant was developing normally. But at the age of 19 months, an illness left her deaf and blind. When Helen was six, her equally famous teacher, Anne Sullivan, was able to teach her to communicate. Helen Keller went on to excel in all aspects of her life: graduating from college with honors and writing, lecturing, and inspiring people worldwide. 根据短文内容，回答下列问题。 12. Why did Helen Keller become deaf and blind? 13. Who was Helen Keller’s teacher? 14. When is Deaf-Blind Awareness Week? 15. What’s the purpose of Deaf-Blind Awareness Week? 2nd Period　Reading (1) 双基提要 1. Words: deserted, brush, fear, still, rare, firmly, beat, rest　 2. Phrases: in sight, wish for, reach out, stare up at, pay back, glance at, watch out for, set off, in a mist, 3. Sentence structure: 1) She wondered if … 2) The truth is that … 3) The fog is too thick for the bus to run that far. 4) She sensed that she was being watched by a tall man in a dark coat. 课堂反馈 选择恰当的词组完成下列各句，注意其形式的变化。每个词组限用一次。 glance at, reach out, watch out for, pay back, get…across, in sight, wish for, be frozen with, make sense, make the most of , be related to, can’t help   1. What problems should I _________when buying an old house? 2. He ____________ and his hand touched rough-grained wood. 3. When he saw a big bear coming towards him, he ____________fright. 4. The boys were so hungry that on arriving home they ate everything __________. 5. He is not very good at __________ his ideas ___________. 6. I couldn’t have been happier: there was nothing else I could _________. 7. Fox has written a book about how culture ______________ art. 8. It would __________ for the parents to join in this discussion with their children. 9. We all ____________ each other, saying nothing, and walked after him. 10. The person told me that he was trying to find every chance to ____________ the help that people gave him when in trouble. 11. Now that we are here, we must _______________ this opportunity to learn more. 12. I ____________ wondering what happened to that little girl. 巩固练习 一、选择文本框中的单词，并用其适当形式填空 observe, beat, hope, ignore, treat, whisper, accept   1. The more time you spend with your students _________ their behaviour, the more effectively you will be able to judge their moods. 2. She could feel her heart ________ with fear. 3. The best _________ for a cold is to rest and drink lots of hot water. 4. James felt more ________about his future after his chat with his professor. 5. Now that she had lost all her wealth, she was _________ by former friends. 6. The two students were so excited that they couldn’t help __________ to each other in the class. 7. I finally _________ the fact that I would die if I didn’t stop smoking. 二、选用适当的介词完成下列句子。 1. __________ lunchtime, we found he didn’t show up. 2. The mist _________ the river banks had gone by mid morning. 3. I noticed that her face went red ______cold. 4. While crossing the streets in the city, you must watch out _____ the vehicles. 5. I don’t think you were listening to me just now. Instead, you were staring 　__________ space. 6. The policeman said there was no evidence the shooting was linked ___________ anything else. 7. The bus didn’t arrive on time. Tom became anxious and glanced ________ his watch from time to time. 8. People like to listen to Beethoven’s music just _______ pleasure. 9. He always won the music competitions, and he quickly became known _______ the best pianist in his country. 10. Haven’t you seen the soldier ______ watch at that gate? He’s so still that he looks like a statue. 三、翻译下列句子。 1、根据天气报告， 明天上午很有可能下雨。 2、我时常想动物和人是否具有同样的意识。 　 3、我看见一位老人很吃力地在街上走着，手里还拿着一根拐杖。 　 4.、到20岁时，那位大学生已经写成了两部小说。 　 5、当这群孩子意识到自己迷路时，他们都禁不住哭了起来。 　 6、她意识到被人跟踪了，然而当她回头看时，再也看不到那人了。 　 7、当她苏醒过来时，发现自己正躺在医院了。 　 8、孩子们一到床上，就会很快入睡了。 　 9、我的电脑上周末被一种未知病毒攻击，因而电脑已坏了一周了。 　 10、我们的问题是到目前为止我们还没有找到一个正确的方法去解决这困难。 　 四、任务型阅读。 阅读下列材料，从所给的六个选项（A、B、C、D、E和F）中，选出符合各小题要求的最佳选项。选项中有一项为多余选项。 The people below are all looking for a place to spend their holiday. After the description of these people, there is information about six tour advertisements A—F. Decide which place would be most suitable for the person mentioned in questions 1-5 and then mark the correct letter (A-F) on your answer sheet. There is one extra paragraph about one place that you do not need to use. _______1. Michael, a young computer programmer, has been working hard and needs holiday to relax in winter. He would like to go somewhere warm and sunny, where he can swim in the sea, and he enjoys sports and dancing. _______2. Jack and his wife Mary, who have recently retired, want to see places of cultural and historic interest abroad, but Mary hates flying. _______3. Harry and Kate, both teachers and their two teenage sons, have to take their holiday during the school summer vacation. There must be plenty for the boys to do, although Harry and Kate want beautiful scenery, good food---and wine---and peace. ______ 4. Peter and Maria, university students, want to travel as far as possible on very little money, and would like to know a country by working there for three months with other young people. _______5. Simon, a schoolteacher, is planning to make a one-day trip to a place, where his students can enjoy the objects of artistic, cultural, historical or scientific importance and interest. A. We now offer you a new service of guided tours for visitors. This prize-winning museum is where　Australia’s history comes alive! Visit daily or stay for the night and experience life of the Gold Rush days. A wonderful nightly sound and light show, “Blood on the Southern Cross” tells you the story of the famous Eureka Uprising. B. Two-week holidays in the luxurious Hotel Splendid, on a lovely beach with golden sands and deep-blue sea. Tennis, golf, sailing and all water sports. Trips and tours around the islands arranged. Near to town of Castries with lively evening entertainment dancing to local bands. C. Holiday apartments in Mallorca sailing and fishing port—quiet even in summer season beautifully situated apartments with views of seas and mountains, yet near to shops and restaurants. Cars and bicycles for hire. Sailing and sports clubs nearby. D. The Empire State Building is among the most striking buildings in the city, the nation, even the world. The observation deck on the 86th floor is open to general public, offering a wonderful view of the city. On the second floor you’ll find the New York Skyride, a simulated helicopter ride over Manhattan. Enjoy shopping along with real life character and entertainment. E. Luxury coach tours of Italy, out of normal holiday season. 21 leisurely days to visit five Italian cities starting from London 1st May, 1st September. The tours are guided by professor Martin Davis formerly Head of Italian Studies, London University. F. Working holidays on a kibbutz in Israel. All nationalities welcome for one of three months, if prepares to work morning with kibbutz members. Accommodation, food and trip to historic sights all provided free ---you pay only for the special low-cost return flight. 3rd Period　Reading (2) 双基提要 1. Words: observe, sense (v.), report, reply, brush 2. Phrases: be gone, be lost, be off, be frozen with, make a decision, sound young 3. Sentence Structures: 1) The tall man was nowhere to be seen. 2) Polly found herself staring up at a man … 3) The face …was that of an old man. 课堂反馈 一、　　　　　  根据首字母或中文提示补全单词。 1. According to the w_________, it’s going to snow tomorrow. 2. The lights suddenly went out, leaving us in d__________. 3. After living in France for a year, I felt much more c_________ about my French. 4. I often watch the little white farmhouse in the d _______ and come to love it. 5. It is very r_________ for her to miss a day at school. She is a good student. 6.They are doing _________ (实验)to learn more about the affects of alcohol(酒) on the brain. 7. At the border you will be asked your ________(目的地) and how long you plan to stay. 8. We passed through several __________(被离弃的) villages where local people had left already. 二、　　　　　  单项选择。 1. ---I think it’s going to be a big problem.　  ---Yes, it could be. ---I wonder ______we can do about it. A. if　  　　　　 B. how　　　　C. what　　 　　　D. that 2. ---Do you think Peter is free today? ---I don’t think so. Recently he has been ______ the most of his time to prepare for the final examinations. A. making　　 B. planning　　　 C. using　　 　　 D. getting　　 3. ---Where is Nick? ---He is standing in front of the window _______ the rain pouring down. A. staring into　 　 B. staring at　　 C. watching out　 　 D. watching for　 4. I think it ________ to let farmers have their own land. In that way, they can farm the land by themselves, and food production will be higher. A. no good　　 B. makes sense　　C. no harm　　　　D. takes sense 巩固练习 一、完形填空。 Throughout history man has accepted the fact that all living things must die，but people now live longer than they used to. Yet，all　1　things still show the effect of aging，which will eventually（最终）　2　death，the body and the　3　they form do not function as well as they 　4　in childhood and adolescence（青春期）.The body provides less　5　 against disease and is more prone（易于……的）　6　accident. A number of related causes may　7　to aging. Some cells of the body have a 　8　 long life，but they are not 　9　 when they die. As a person ages，　10　of brain cells and muscle cells decreases. Other body cells did and are replaced by new cells. In an aging person the 　11 　cells may not be as viable（能生存的） or as capable　　12　 growth as those of a young person. Another factor in aging may be changes within the cells　　13　. Some of the protein chemicals in cells 　14　 known to change 　15　 age and become less elastic. This is also the reason old people shrink（收缩） in 　16　. There may be other more important chemical changes in the cells. Some complex cell chemicals，　17　 DNA and RNA，store and 　18　 information that the cells need. Aging may 　19　 this process and change the information carrying molecules 　20　 they do not transmit the information as well. 1. A. living　　　B. alive　　　　　C. lively　　　　　　D. lovely 2. A. result in　　　B. result from　　　 C. end in　　　　　　D. conclude 3. A. hands　　　 B. brains　　　　 C. organs　　　　　　D. legs 4. A. made　　B. did　　　　C. grew　　　　　　　D. had 5. A. prevention　B. protection　　 C. strength　　　　　D. vitamin 6. A. of　　　　　B. to　　　　　　 C. with　　　　　　　D. at 7. A. contribute　B. compare　　C. strength　　　　　D. be drawn 8. A. fairly　　　B. much　　　　　 C. fair　　　　　　　D. fare 9. A. repeated　　　 B. related　　　　C. replaced　　　　　D. rearranged 10. A. the amount B. an amount　　　C. the number　　　　D. a number 11. A. remaining　B. other　　　　　C. old　　　　　　D. new 12. A. of　　　　 B. to　　　　　　 C. with　　　　　　　D. for 13. A. themselves B. itself　　　　 C. by themselves　　 D. of themselves 14. A. is　　　　 B. are　　　　C. was　　　　　　D. were 15. A. with　　　 B. within　　　　 C. for　　　　　　D. on 16. A. height　　 B. high　　　　　 C. heighten　　　　　D. higher 17. A. as such　　　 B. as that　　　　C. as though　　　　 D. such as 18. A. pass on　　　 B. pass by　　C. pass into　　　　 D. pass off 19. A. cancel　　 B. affect　　　　 C. influence　　　　 D. damage 20. A. so that　　　 B. providing　　　C. in case　　　　　 D. if 二. 阅读理解 A My teenage son Karl became withdrawn after his father died. As a single parent, I tried to do my best to talk to him, but the more I tried, the more he pulled away. When his report card arrived during his junior year, it said that he had been absent 95 times from classes and had six failing grades for the year. At this rate he would never graduate. I sent him to the school adviser, and I even begged him. Nothing worked. One night I felt so powerless that I got down on my knees and pleaded for help. “Please God, I can’t do anything more for my son. I’m at the end of my rope. I’m giving the whole thing up to you.” I was at work when I got a phone call. A man introduced himself as the headmaster. “I want to talk to you about Karl’s absences.” Before he could say another word, I choked up and all my disappointment and sadness over Karl came pouring out into the ears of this stranger. “I love my son but I just don’t know what to do. I’ve tried everything to get Karl to go back to school and nothing has worked. It’s out of my hands.” For a moment there was silence on the other end of the line. The headmaster seriously said, “Thank you for your time.” and hung up. Karl’s next report card showed a marked improvement in his grades. Finally, he even made the honor roll. In his fourth year, I attended a parent-teacher meeting with Karl. I noticed that his teachers were astonished at the way he had turned himself around. On our way home, he said, “Mum, remember that call from the headmaster last year?” I nodded. “That was me. I thought I’d play a joke but when I heard what you said, it really hit me how much I was hurting you. That’s when I knew I had to make you proud.” 1. By saying “Karl became withdrawn”, the author means that the boy changed entirely and______. A. preferred to stay alone at home 　　　　 B. lost interest in his studies C. refused to talk to others 　　　　　 D. began to dislike his mother 2. There was silence on the other end of the line because ________. A. the speaker was too moved to say anything to the mother B. the speaker waited for the mother to finish speaking C. the speaker didn’t want the mother to recognize his voice D. the speaker was unable to interrupt the mother 3. The sentence “...he even made the honor roll” means that “________”. A. he was even on the list to be praised at the parent-teacher meeting B. he was even on the list of students who made progress in grades C. he was even on the list of students who had turned themselves around D. he was even on the list of the best students at school 4. What is the main idea of this passage? A. Children in single-parent families often have mental problems. B. Mother’s love plays an important role in teenagers’ life. C. Being understood by parents is very important to teenagers. D. School education doesn’t work without full support from parents. B A teacher of English as a second language is the 2004 Teacher of the Year in the United States. Kathy Mellor of Rhode Island will spend the next year as an international spokeswoman for education. President Bush and his wife, Laura, honored her during a ceremony（仪式）at the White House last week. For the past nineteen years, Kathy Mellor has taught English as a second language at Davisville Middle School in North Kingstown, Rhode Island, in the northeastern United States. She redesigned the program for E.S.L students at her school to provide each student with one to three periods per day in classes for English learners. How much instruction the students get depends on their level of skill in listening, speaking, reading and writing. The amount of time they spend in these classes is reduced as their level of English increases. A teacher describes this as the most successful E.S.L. program in North Kingstown. She also praises Kathy Mellor for providing help to students and their families by forming a local parents group for speakers of other languages. This improved their ability to help their children. Kathy Mellor earned a master’s degree in education from Rhode Island College. She studied teaching English as a second language. She was chosen for the national honor of Teacher of the Year from among top teachers in each of the fifty states. As Teacher of the Year, Kathy Mellor will travel around the United States and to other countries. She will talk about the importance of education and the work of teachers. 5. This passage is mainly about______. A. teacher of the Year 2004 in the United States B. Ms Mellor’s English teaching instruction 　C. Ms Mellor’s teaching skills of learning English D. praises to Ms Mellor from other teachers 6. What does “E.S.L.” in the passage stand for? A. English study learners.　　　　　　　　　B. English speaking and listening. C. English special learners.　　　　　　　　D. English as a second language. 7. From this passage we can learn that______. A. middle school teachers from each state are honored Teachers of the Year B. middle school teachers in the USA have to get master’s degrees C. Ms Mellor’s students have no problems in learning English D. the American government pays much attention to education 4th Period　Reading (3) 双基提要 故事类文章的阅读方法和技巧。 课堂反馈 Some people were queuing outside the Scalar Theatre for tickets for a very popular show. They had to wait for several hours, and during that time they were entertained by a young man who was playing very nicely on a trumpet（喇叭）. The queue enjoyed his music and put quite a lot of money in the box that he had on the ground in front of him. At last one of the people in the queue said to him, “You play too well to be a beggar.” “I’m not a beggar”, the young man said. “I’m studying to be a trumpet player in a big band, and I have to practise several hours every day, so I thought it would be nice to do it in the fresh air instead of in my small room on days when the weather was nice---and also to get a bit of money at the same time.” 1. The tickets for the show___. A. were difficult to buy　　　　　　　 B. were easy to get C. were sold out in a short while　　　　 D. were not to be sold out 2. Why were there so many people waiting outside the Scalar Theatre? Because _______. A. there was a young man playing very nicely on a trumpet B. part of the show at the theatre was a popular entertainment by the young man who played the trumpet C. the show was very popular D. the weather was nice 3. The young man ________. 　　A. was a beggar　　　　　　　　　　B. played better than the usual beggars 　　C. played the trumpet in the band at the Scala Theatre 　　D. played in his small room in good weather with his windows open to get fresh air 4. The young man could ________ by doing so. 　A. get some money　　　　　　　　　　B. practise playing on the trumpet 　C. get fresh air　　　　　　　　　　　　D. all of the above. 5. The people were willing to give the money to the young man because _______. 　A. they felt great sympathy for him　　　　 B. they were entertained by him 　C. he always played on the trumpet　　　　　D. they wanted to help him 巩固练习 A　　　　　　　 An experiment was once done by Karl von Frisch, in which he studied bee activities when they returned to their home called a hive (蜂窝). The experiment showed that there was a means by which a bee communicated to other bees that it had found food. That was dance! In fact, bees do two kinds of dances to tell other bees of their food discovery. First, there is a circle dance, in which the bee moves in a circle inside the hive. The circle dance is used when the food is not more then ten metres away. A second kind of dance done by the bee is a waggling dance. That is to say, the bee wiggles the end of its body as it moves in a straight line, then it turns in a semicircle (半圆), runs straight again. The waggling dance is used when the food is more than ten metres away. Meanwhile, in the two dances, the bees smell the dancing bee that has found the food. The smell tells them where to find the flower and also what kind of flower to look for. For this really interesting work, Karl von a Nobel Prize. 1. Karl von Frisch won a Nobel Prize for _____________. 　　A. communicating with bees.　　　　B. having studied bees’ activities. 　　C. setting up an experimental base.　　D. the discovery of bees’ looking for food. 2. If the food is ______ away, the bee will move in a circle. 　　A. 16 metres　 　 B. 20 metres　　　C. 8 metres　　 D. 30 metres 3. The bees know where to find the food by the ________ of the bee that has found it.　　　 　　A. color　　　 　 B. design　　　　 C. smoke　　 D. smell 4. Which of the following statements may be true? 　A. Karl von Frisch did the experiment to find out if bees had a language of their own. 　B. In their spare time, bees often do two kinds of dances. 　C. Bees can communicate to one other as human beings do. 　D. In the circle dance, the bee waggles the hind half of its body.　　　 B　　　　　　　　 Ask Steveland Morris and he’ll tell you that blindness is not necessarily disabling. Steveland was born earlier than expected time and totally without sight in 1950. He became Stevie Wonder—composer, singer, and pianist. The winter of ten Grammy awards, Stevie is widely admired for his great contributions to the music world. As a child, Stevie learned not to think about the things he could not do, but to fix his attention on the things that he could do. His parents encouraged him to join his sighted brothers in as many activities as possible. They also helped him to sharpen his sense of hearing, the sense upon which the visually disabled are so dependent. 　　Because sound was so important to him, Stevie began at an early age to experiment with different kinds of sound. He would bang things together and then imitate the sound with his voice. Often depending on sound for entertainment, he sang, beat on toy drums, played a toy harmonica, and listened to radio. Stevie soon graduated from toy instruments to real instruments, he first learned to play the drums. He then mastered the harmonica and the piano. He became a member of the junior church choir and a lead singer. In the evenings and on weekends, Stevie would play different instruments and sing popular songs in the front of neighbors’ homes. One of Stevie’s recordings was overheard by Ronnie White, a member of a popular singing group called The Miracles. Ronnie immediately recognized Stevie’s gift and took him to audition (试音) for Berry Gordy, the president of Histville USA, a large recording company now known as Motown. Stevie recorded his first hit “Fingertips” in 1962 at the age of twelve, and the rest of Stevie’s story is music history. 5. By saying “Stevie soon graduated from toy instruments to real instruments”, the author means that______________ 　　A. Stevie started to play real instruments. 　　B. Stevie gave up all his toy instruments and beganto buy real instruments. 　　C. Stevie began to study in a real instruments school. 　　D. Stevie finished his study at a toy instrument school. 6. To whom did Steveland should owe his success? 　　A. Just Ronnie White　　  　　　　 B. His parents and brothers. 　　C. His teachers　　　　　 　　　　 D. his parents, brothers and Ronnie White. 7. the best title for this passage might be ___________. 　　A. Stevie Wonder　　　　 　　　　　B. Great Musicians　 C. Blind People　　　　  　　　　　D. The Music World C　 Coffee has been a part of people’s lives for thousands of years, and today it is still one of the favourite drinks in the world. Many people in the world began their busy day drinking a cup of coffee or several cups of coffee. They have always said that a cup of coffee in the morning help them begin their day in the right way. Do you know what in the coffee makes our bodies and brains active? It is caffeine may increase a person’s mental and physical abilities. For example, two cups of coffee will make you breathe faster and augment body heat. All this makes your heart beat faster, and doctors warn that this may be a little dangerous. Caffeine is found in tea, coffee, chocolate and some other foods. A little caffeine is probably not harmful. But too much caffeine can make people nervous and sleepless. That’s why many people don’t drink coffee after supper or before they go to bed. 8. A good title for this passage is ____________. 　　A. coffee is Harmful　　　　　　 　　　B. Coffee and Tea 　　C. Caffeine and Health　　　　　 　　　D. Caffeine is Useful 9. The underlined word “augment” probably means___________. 　　A. increase　　 　B. drink　　　　　　 C. stop　　 　　　D. make less. 10. Which of the following is NOT true? 　　A. Coffee has been a part of people’s lives for thousands of years. 　　B. Caffeine dose no harm to our body. 　　C. Two cups of coffee will make you breathe faster and increase body heat. 　　D. Caffeine may increase our mental and physical abilities. D Life gets noise every day and very few people can be free from noise of some sort or another. It doesn’t matter where you live—in the middle of a modern city or a far-away village---the chances are that you will be disturbed by planes, transistor radios, oiled-powered engines, etc. we seem to be getting used noise, too. Some people feel quite lonely without background music while they are working. Scientific tests have shown that total silence can be very frightening experience for a human being. However, some people enjoy listening to pop music which is very loud, and this can do harm to their eardrums. The noise level in some discs is far above the usual safety for heavy industrial areas. One recent report about noise and concentration suggested that although a lot of people say that any noise disturbs their concentration, what really influences the ability to concentration is a change in the level of noise. It goes on to say that a background noise which doesn’t change too much may even help to concentrate. 11. According to this passage, the noise pollution ___________. 　 A. has become the worst in the countryside 　 B. has become better in big cities 　 C. has spend from cities to villages. 　 D. has been controlled in modern cities. 12. What dose background music refer to? 　 A. Music played while people are working. 　 B. Music played in the backyard. 　 C. Noise that continues while you are listening to other noises. 　 D. Music used to help people to concentrate. 13. Some people have their hearing harmed ___________. 　 A. while listening to music.　　　　　 B. in complete silence 　 C. when speaking loudly　　　　　　 D. while watching TV 14. Which of the following isn’t included among the things causing noise? 　 A. Bicycles.　 　　　 B. Motorcycles.　　C. Electric engines.　 　　D. Planes 5th Period　Word Power 双基提要 Words:　thunderstorm, floods, tornadoes, snowstorm, overcast, drizzly, fog, mist, showers, lightning, occasional, afford Phrases: in some cases, so far, go hungry, look up, fetch my umbrella, weather forecast 课堂反馈 I. Fill in the blanks with words from the sentences, changing the forms if necessary. 1. Please be ____________. We have enough seats for everybody to sit on. 2. Every year we ___________ trees on May, 12th. Trees and other plants provide us with fresh air. 3. Do remember _______________ the flowers every day. It will die from lack of water. 4. Go __________ down this road and you’ll see another straight road across it. 5. The policemen _______________ all the witnesses but none of them could give a definite answer to the question. 6. The old man ________________ the two World Wars. He is a man of lots of experiences. 7. While I was ______________ for my holiday last night, I found a pack of my clothes missing. 8. Don’t look back when a wolf is already on your __________. 9. The head of our school are ___________ for Hong Kong on a visit to a school there. 10. They are close friends. They always stand __________ to each other as if they were tied together. II. Translate the following. 1. A: Beautiful day, isn’t it?　　　　　　　　　  B: Yes, it’s not like what the radio said at all.　 A: I wish it would stay this way for the weekend.　　 B: As long as it doesn’t snow!　　　　　　　　 2. What bad/good weather! 3. Most of North and South China will have a cold wet day. 4. It will be cloudy/rainy at times. 5. The temperature will stay above zero in the day-time, but at night it will fall below zero again. 6. The weather is improving／worsening. 巩固练习 A Mr. Black and Mr. White were two very famous artists in the city. Their drawings were also very popular in the city. But they tried to see who could draw the best picture. 　　One day they asked an old man to be the judge. Mr. Black drew an apple tree. He put his picture in the field. Soon the birds came and tried to eat the apples. The old man saw it and said, “You have certainly won. Mr. White cannot draw so good a picture as yours. But we will go to see his picture.” They went to Mr. White’s house. There were nothing but red beautiful curtains on the wall. The old man asked, “Where is your picture, Mr. White?” He said, “Lift the curtains, and you will find my picture.” The old man tried to lift the curtains but found that they were drawn there. They were Mr. White’s picture. The old man said, “Birds thought the apples were real. Men thought the curtains were real. So Mr. White won. His picture is the best one.” 1. Mr. Black drew　　　 . 　　A. an apple tree　　 B. the best picture　　　C. curtains　　　 D. birds 2. The old man thought Mr. Black’s picture was good because　　　 . 　 A. it was in the field　　　　　　　　　　B. it was an apple tree　　 C. the birds liked it 　　　　　　　　　　D. the birds thought it was real 3. Mr. White’s picture was　　 　. 　 A. an apple tree　　 B. curtains　　　　　C. nothing　　D. an old man 4. Which of the following statements is TRUE? A. The birds came and ate the apples up.　　　 B. The old man said Mr. White’s picture was the best one at last. C. The two pictures were not so good. D. The curtains on the wall were real. B English words don’t stay the same. People need new words for new ideas and new inventions. Different words come into use, or older words are used in a new way. English can change by borrowing words from other languages. The word “tomato” was borrowed from Mexico, and “tea” came from China and so on . Now new space and science words are being borrowed from other countries, too. New words are formed by adding two words together. “Weekend” and “cookbook” are made up of two parts. Sometimes new words are shorter forms of older words. The word “photo” was made from “photograph” by cutting off the end of the longer word. “Plane” was made by cutting off the front part of “airplane”. The names of people and products（产品） can become new words. Our “sandwich” was named after a man named Sandwich and “sello”（透明胶带）was a name given by the company that first made the product. 5. Which of the following words was taken to English from another country? 　　A. Plane　　　　　　　　　　B. Sandwich　　　 C. Tomato　　　　　　　　D. Weekend 6. We know from the passage that　　　　　　  . 　　A. new science words are shorter than the old ones B. the best way to make a new word is adding words together C. some new English words come from company names D. most new English words are borrowed from other languages 7. How many ways of developing English words does the passage tell us? 　　A. Three　　　　　B. Four　　　 C. Five　　　　　 D. Six 8. The main idea of this passage is　　　　 . 　　A. that the English language is always changing B. that there are new ideas in England today C. how people name new products and inventions D. how the change of languages goes on in the world C 　　Do you want to know something about the history of weather? Don’t look at the sky. Don’t look for old weather reports. Looking at tree rings is more important. Correct weather reports date back only one century, but some trees can provide an exact record of the weather even further back. 　　It is natural that a tree would grow best in a climate with plenty of sunlight and rainfall. It is also expected that little sunlight and rainfall would limit the growth of a tree. The change from a favorable to an unfavorable climate can be determined by reading the pattern of rings in a tree trunk. To find the weather of ten years ago, count the rings of a tree trunk from the outside to the inside. If the tenth ring is far from the other rings, then it is certain that plenty of sunny and rainy weather occurred. If the rings are closed together, then the climate was bad for the tree. Studying tree rings is important not only for the history of weather, but also for the history of man. In a region of New Mexico you can find only sand---no trees and no people. However, many centuries ago a large population lived there. They left suddenly. Why? A scientist studied patterns of dead tree rings which had grown there. He decided that the people had to leave because they had cut down all the trees. Trees were necessary to make fires and buildings. So, after the people destroyed the trees, they had to move. In this instance studying tree rings uncovers an exciting fact about the history of man. 9. It is understood that in a favorable climate ________. 　　A. tree rings grow together 　　B. tree rings grow far apart 　　C. trees in New Mexico will grow big and tall 　　D. people can cut down most of the trees in New Mexico 10. The scientists are interested in studying tree rings because they can tell ___. 　　A. whether in that area the climate was favorable or not 　　B. whether a particular tree was healthy or not 　　C. whether people took good care of the trees or not 　　D. how old the trees were 11. By studying the dead tree rings, the scientist discovered ___. 　　A. where the people had left 　　B. what the people used to eat 　　C. how the people left D. why the people had to leave 12. The people had to leave the region of New Mexico because ___. 　　A. they had cut down all the trees 　　B. there were many trees there 　　C. they had no water 　　D. bad weather stopped the growth of trees 13. The main idea of the passage is _________. 　　A. tree rings reflect the history of weather and the history of man 　　B. destroying tree will do man no good 　　C. studying tree ring is the only way to know the history of weather 　　D. man shouldn’t cut so many trees　 6th period  Grammar (1) 双基提要 1. Introduction of noun clauses. 2. Noun clauses can be used as subject, object, predictive and appositive. 课堂反馈 一、单项选择。 1. He can’t answer the question ___________ he got the money. A. that　　　　　 B. why　　　　C. how　　　　D. whether 2. ______ surprised me most was _______ such a little boy can speak English so well. A. That; what　　 B. What; that　　 C. That; that　　 D. What; what 3. Everything depends on ________ we have enough experience. A. if　　　　　　 B. whether　　C. that　　　　　 D. when 4. After Yang Liwei succeeded in circling the Earth, __________ our astronauts desired to do is walk in space. A. where　　　　　B. what　　　　　 C. that　　　　　 D. how 5. _________ he will send us invitation is not yet known, _______ we hope they will. A. Whether, but　 B. If, and　　　　C. That, but　　　D. What, otherwise 二、用适当的连词填空 1. I had neither a raincoat nor an umbrella. That is __________ I got wet through. 2. --- What is the building? --- That’s _______ the medical equipment is stored. 3. He is _________ is known as hacker--- he liked to show off on the Internet and attack websites. 4. ________ ways will be found to stop pollution or not is _________ worries the public. 5. _________ the doctors really doubt is ________ his mother will recover from the serious disease soon. 6. _________ worried the child was _________ his not being allowed to visit the hospital. 7. _______ most of these are now threatened and may disappear is a serious matter to the people in Britain. 8. They realize _______it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation. 巩固练习 一、单项选择 1. I don’t know the reason _________ you were absent from the meeting, but I am sure that someone will tell me the reason ______ you haven’t told me. A. why; that　　　　　　　　　　B. that; why　　　 C. because; which　　　　　　　 D. of which; that 2. He knew the files could be of help to ___________ took over the job. A. whoever　　B. whatever　　　 C. whomever　　　 D. whosever 3. _________China got the second place in the 2004 Olympic Games made the whole nation very excited. A. Whenever　　　 B. Whether　　C. If　　　　　　 D. That 4. An idea occurred to me _________ I might turn to my English teacher for help. A. which　　　　　B. that　　　　　 C. where　　　　　D. when 5. ________________ was of little importance. A. Whether he passed the examination or not B. No matter he might pass the examination C. He might pass the examination D. If he passed the examination 6. The thick smog covered the whole city. It was _________ a great black blanket had been thrown over it. A. that　　　　　 B. because　　C. as if　　　　　D. even if 7. Word came from Mr. Smith __________ he could arrive on the following Saturday. A. about which　　B. that　　　　　 C. whether　　D. of which 8. ---I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week. ---Is that _________ you had a few days off? (NMET　99) A. why　　　　  　B. when　　　　　 C. what　　　　　 D. where 9. _______ was known to them that Bob had broken his promise ______ he would give them a rise. A. What; what　　 B. It; which　　　C. As; that　　　 D. It; that 10. Actually, girls can be ______ they want to be just like boys, whether it is a pilot, an astronaut, or a general manager. A. wherever　　　 B. however　　C. whatever　　　 D. whoever 11. Perhaps _______ most separates the successful people from others is _______ they live on purpose. A. what; that　　 B. that; what　　 C. that; that　　　 D. what; what 12. --- Do you know ______ Mr. Black’s address is? --- He may live at No.18 or No.19 of Bridge Street. A. which　　　　　B. where　　　　　C. what　　　　　 D. that 13. When you answer questions in a job interview, please remember the golden rule: Always give the monkey exactly __________ he wants. A. what　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. when　　　　　 D. that 14. Determination is a kind of quality---and that is ______ it takes to do anything well. A. that　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. why　　　　D. what 15. After five hours’ drive, they reached _______ they thought was the place they had been dreaming. A. that　　　　　 B. where　　　　　C. which　　　　　D. what 16. There is no doubt __________ China is always trying to keep world peace and fight against any war. A. that　　　　　 B. whether　　C. if　　　　　　 D. when 17. These wild flowers are so special that I would do ______ I can to save them. A. whatever　　　 B. that　　　　　 C. which　　　　　D. whichever 18. I have made it clear __________ I’ll never go back there. A. when　　　　　 B. that　　　　　 C. where　　　　　D. however 19. A story goes _________ Mr. Smith liked nothing more than being surrounded by children in the garden. A. when　　　　　 B. where　　　　　C. what　　　　　 D. that 20. Later they discovered ________ was news to him, that Pamela was the headmaster’s daughter. A. that　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. what　　　　　 D. who 21. You can get _______ you want. A. no matter what B. what ever　　　C. that　　　　　 D. whatever 22. The English-Chinese dictionary will be given to _______ wins the first prize. A. who　　　　B. whomever　　　 C. whoever　　D. which 23. I was surprised to know the fact ________ he had always cheated in exams, A. that　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. /　　　　　　　D. what 24. _______ we can’t get always seems better than ______ we have. A. What; what　　 B. What; that　　 C. That; that　　 D. That; what 25. It’s said _________ has been translated into French. A. that　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. that; that　　 D. that; which 26. ____________ in ancient times still remains a mystery. A. How were the pyramids built　　　B. How the pyramids were built C. Where the pyramids were built　　　 D. Where were the pyramids built 27. --- ___________ helps others will be helped. --- So I will be thankful to and try to help _________ has helped us. A. Whoever; whomever　　　　　　B. Whoever; whoever C. Who; whoever　　　　　　　　 D. Who; whomever 28. I hate __________ when people talk with their mouths full.　(NMET 98) A. it　　　　　  B. that　　　　  C. these　　　　　D. them 29. A computer can only do ________ you have instructed it to do. (NMET 2001) A. how　　　　  B. after　　　　 　C. what　　　　　 D. when 30. We’ve heard the news ________ we’ll move into the new house. 　　A. what　　　　　 B. which　　　　　C. why　　　　D. that 二、用适当连词填空 1. ____________ he is ready to help others is well-known.  2. _____________ he will attend the meeting is not decided. 3. _____________ team will win the match is still unknown. 4. _____________ we need is your help. 5. ____________ he became a famous musician is known to all. 6. It’s a pity _______ she has made such a mistake. 7. That is _________ I didn’t attend the meeting. 8. __________ breaks the rule, he must be punished. 9. The possibility ___________ the majority of the labor force will work at home is often discussed. 10. I have no idea ___________ he will be back. 11. ____________ I am most interested in is American movies. 12. __________ he says is of no importance. 13. __________ he will come is certain. 14. ____________ he is often late for class is more than I can tell. 15. ______ is going to attend the important meeting has not been decided by the manager. 16. It is possible _________ they will complete the building in three months. 17. The news _________ a professor from USA will visit our school spreads all over the campus. 18. It depends on _______ he is ready or not. 19. You should make a decision ____________ you will go or stay. 20. The idea ________ we can master a foreign language in a short time is totally wrong. 7th period  Grammar (2) 双基提要 1. Words: reduce, volunteer, experiment, data, change, add 2. Phrases: be related to, be linked to　 3. Noun clauses: what/ that/ whether 课堂反馈 一、补全下列句子 1. what / that a.__________ he said at the meeting surprised us. b.__________ he spoke at the meeting surprised us. 2. if / whether a. _______ you go or stay at home won’t make any differences. b. He asked the doctor ________ his father’s operation had been successful. 3. 能告诉我你怎么了吗?  Can you tell me________________________? 4．会议在什么时间、什么地点开还没有定下来。 When and where the meeting will begin ______________________. 5. 我原来不知道你在伦敦。 Hello, I didn’t know ______________________. 二、单词拼写　根据首字母或中文提示补全下列单词。 1. There’s always a p_____________ that he might go back to Shanghai. 2. He gave no e＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ for what he was doing that evening. 3. Tests have _____________（证明）that the system works. 4. Now it’s possible to store a lot more ________（数据）on a DVD. 5. I need some _____________（志愿者）to help with the washing-up. 6. I ____________（建议）we take a break and finish this later. 7. After a moment of silence, she _________（补充说）, “I’m a friend of Annie’s.” 8. In fact education levels are strongly r__________ to income. 9. The pipe must be ___________（与…相连）to the cold water supply. 10. I can’t remember how the tune goes but I’ll __________（辨认出）it when I hear it. 巩固练习 一、单项选择 1. What a pity _____is _____you didn’t arrive by daylight. 　 A. there; because　　　　B. it; that　　　　　C. he; when　 　　D. that; for 2. We are ready to do ______ the country wants us to do. 　 A. what　　　　　　　B. which　　　　　C. no matter what 　 D. whatever 3. _______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language. A. There　　　　 B. This　　　　　 C. That　　　　 　D. It 4. 　　 we can’t get seems better than 　　 we have.　 　　 A. What; what　　　 　 B. What; that　　 　 C. That; that　　 　 D. That; what 5. I read about it in some book or other, does it matter________it was?　　　　 A. where　　　　　 　B. what　　　　  C. how　　　　 D. which 6. It’s generally considered unwise to give a child ________ he or she wants.　　　　 A. however　　　　　 B. whatever　　　 C. whichever　　 D. wherever 7. ---I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week. ---Is that _________ you had a few days off?　　　　  　　A. why　　　 　　 B. when　　　　　 C. what 　　　　　D. where 8. Perseverance is a kind of quality---and that’s ______ it takes to do anything well.　 A. what　　　 　　　 B. that　　　  　 C. which　　　　 D. why 9. Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, ______ I will always treasure.　(NMET 2002)　 　　A. that　　　　 　　 B. one　　　　 　 C. it　　　　　 　D. what 10. There’s a feeling in me　　　　 we’ll never know what a UFO is---not ever.　 A. that　　　　  　　　B. which　　　 　 C. of which　　　 D. what 11. There is a new problem involved in the popularity of private cars 　　　　 road conditions need 　　　.　　　 A. that; to be improved　　　　　　　　　 B. which; to be improved　 C. where; improving　　　　　　　　　　D. when; improving　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 12. Can you make sure ______ the gold ring? A. where Alice had put　　　　　　　　　　　　B. where did Alice put C. where Alice has put　　　　　　　　　　　　D. where has Alice put　 二、请用适当的名词性从句完成下列短文。 All the housewives who went to the new supermarkets had one great ambition (愿望) _________________________________________（他们有一天可能成为购物不用交钱的幸运顾客）. For this was  ______________________________________(这是入口处里的一则启事所承诺的). It said: “Remember, once a week, one of our customers gets free goods. This May Be Your Lucky Day!” One Friday morning, after Mrs. White had finished her shopping and had taken it to her car, she found ________________________ （她忘记买茶叶了）. So she dashed back to the supermarket again, got the tea and went　towards the cash-desk. Just at that moment, _______________________ (最让她吃惊的事) was that she was told to be the lucky customer at that day. Of course, she got the tea for free finally.  三．阅读理解 A LONDON: The Edinburgh Festival, the biggest arts festival of its kind in the world, got under way in the Scotland capital on Sunday with a concert that included Hector Berlionz’s “To Deum”, under the direction of Christoph von Dohnanyi. The festival, which runs until August 31 this year, includes as its high points Peter Stein’s staging of Wagner’s “Parsifal”, with Claudio Abbado directing the Gustav Mahler youth orchestra（管弦乐队）. The concert programme includes American pianist Richard Goode, bass baritone Thomas Quasthoff and violinist Christian Tetzlaff. New to the programmes this year will be 25 late evening classical music concerts. Earlier this month, the Edinburgh Fringe Festival, the largest show-case in the world for performance art, officially got under way with theatre, dance, poetry and music presentations. Many of the fringe artists, who can enter the fringe festival upon payment of a small fee, were inspired this year by the event of September 11. Thousands of people flock to Edinburgh from around the world during the festival, which is over 50 years old. It aims to promote（促进）and encourage arts and to reflect international culture. It comprises (consists of) various dance, music, opera, and theatre presentation taking place across the city during the three-week run. 1. When did the Edinburgh Festival begin? 　A. August 10.　　 B. August 15. 　C. August 31. 　D. September 11. 2. What did the Edinburgh Festival never have before? 　　A. Youth orchestra’s performances.　　　 B. Poetry and music presentations. 　　C. Late evening classical music concerts. D. Performances of American pianists and violinists. 3. Which of the following statements about the Edinburgh Festival is true? 　A. It is the only festival of its kind in the world. 　B. The artists who want to take part in the festival have to pay a small amount of money. 　C. People who attend the festival are all from Scotland. D. It is actually a dance festival. 4. The purpose of holding the Edinburgh Festival is _______. 　　A. to attract people around the world to Edinburgh　 B. to display Scottish arts 　　C. to attract famous artists to Edinburgh 　　D. to promote the development of arts and the exchange of cultures of different countries. B With a good shopping position and the right amount（数量）of money, any educated person ought to be able to make a living out of a bookshop. It is not a difficult trade to learn and the large chain-stores can never force the small bookseller out of existence as they have done to the corner shop. But the hours of work are very long-I was only doing a part-time job, but my boss put in a seventy-hour week, besides regular journeys out of shopping hours to buy books. The real reason why I should not like to be back in the book trade for life, however, is that while I was in it I lost my love of books. A bookseller cannot always tell the truth about his books, and that gives him a dislike for them. There was a time when I really did love books—loved the sight and smell and feel of them—if they were fifty or more years old, that is. Nothing pleased me quite so much as to buy a bargain lot of them on sale for several pounds. There is a peculiar flavour（独特的味道）about the unexpected books you pick up in that kind of collection: little-known eighteenth-century poets, or out-of-date geography books. For occasional（偶尔的）reading—in your bath, for example, or late at night when you are too tired to go to bed—there is nothing as good as a very old picture story-book. But as soon as I went to work in the bookshop I stopped buying books. Seen in a mass. five or ten thousand at a time, books were dull and even a little tiresome. Nowadays I do buy one occasionally, but only if it is a book that I want to read and can’t borrow, and I never buy rubbish. 5. According to the passage, 　　  is one of the necessary conditions to run a bookshop. 　A. an educated shop-owner　　　　 B. a good position at a street corner 　C. a regular journey out of the shop　　　　　　 D. the force of large chain-stores 6. The author should not like to be back as a bookseller for life because 　　 . A. he hated his job of selling books　B. selling books was only a part-time job C. books in the shop gave him a dislike D. he was unable to be honest about the books he sold 7. The books preferred by the author should be those 　　 . A. stories making readers sleepless　　　　　　　B. valuable ones bought on sale C. peculiar ones with great expectation D. geography ones from the eighteenth century 8. The author will only buy new books 　　 . 　A. if he feels dull and tired　　　　　　　 B. after he gives up his job as a bookseller 　C. which are interesting but hard to borrow  D. when he throws away old ones 8th period　Grammar (3) 双基提要 Grammar: noun clauses and the different functions in various sentences. 课堂反馈 单项选择 1. He can’t answer the question __________ he got the money.  　　A. that　　　　 　B. why　　　　 　 C. how　　　　　　D. whether 2. You are saying that everyone should be equal, and this is _______I disagree. 　　A. why 　　　　　B. where 　　 C. what 　　　　　D. how 3. Everything depends on _____________ we have enough experience.　 　　A. if　　　　　　 B. whether　 　　 C. that　　　　　 D. when 4. The factory _____________ we visited last week is not far from here. 　　A. that　　　　 　B. where　　　　　C. when　　　　 　D. on which 5. ______ is reported in the newspapers, talks between the two countries are making 　progress. 　　A. It　　　　  　 B. As　　　　 C. That　　　　  D. what 6. After Yang Liwei succeeded in circling the earth, _______ our astronauts desire to do is 　to walk in space.　 　　A. where　　　 　 B. what　　　　　 C. that　　　　  D. how 7. They are so alike that you can’t tell ___________ is which.　 　　A. what　　　　 　B. that　　　　  C. which　　　　　D. how 8. It wasn’t such a good dinner ______________ she had promised us.　 　　A. that　　　 　　B. which　 　　C. as　　　　　 　D. what 9. It is certain _________ she will do well in her final examination.　 　　A. whether 　　　 B. if　　　 　　　C. that　　　　 　D. / 10. Please let me know _________ you want to go or not.  　　A. that　　　　　 B. if　　　 　　　C. whether　　　　D. / 11. Are you sorry for ___________ you’ve done? 　　A. what　　　　　 B. which　　　 　 C. why　　　　 　 D. how 12. I’ll show you _____________ you want to see.　 　　A. whichever　 　 B. however 　　　 C. whatever　　　 D. what 13. He has made it clear _____________ he will not give in.  　　A. whether　 　　 B. if　　　　 　　C. that　　　　  D. / 14. There is doubt _____________ they will win the football game or not . 　　A. that　　　 　　B. whether　　 　 C. if　　　　　  D. when　　 巩固练习 一、完形填空 If you have felt shy, at least once, you are not alone. Everyone feels shy in some    1　 . Shyness is what causes that “funny” feeling you 　2　 when you are around other people. It is just something that 　3　. It can just sneak up on you. You might feel fine on 　4　 way to deliver (递送) newspapers, but you could become jittery (战战兢兢的) when the time 　5　 to knock on doors to 　6　 the money for those papers. Some people are born shy and more sensitive. For most of us, shyness is 　7　 when we are trying something new. You 　8　 discover that your friends are just as shy as you are when it comes to reading reports in school for the 　9　 time. This type of shyness usually goes away 　10  you get some practice. If you are shy, know that something you feel shy 　11  today most likely won’t bother you the next time. Just be yourself, be the 　12　 you can be, and 　13  your feelings of nervousness with a good friend or your 　14　. Talking about your shyness may help you get over it. Your friends or parents may tell you that they too have the same shy feelings and what it is they do to feel less shy. Remember, shyness is a normal part of 　15　 up, just like learning to ride a bike or walking to the store by yourself for the first time. It may seem scary at first, but it will get easier! 1. A. situations 　　B. times 　　　　 C. conditions 　　　　　 D. places 2. A. have 　　　　　B. get 　　　　　 C. face 　　　　　　 D. fear 3. A. feels 　　　　 B. changes 　　　 C. happens 　　　　　D. takes 4. A. your 　　　　　B. my 　　　　C. its 　　　　　　　D. his 5. A. arrives 　　　　　 B. gets 　　　　　C. reaches 　　　　　D. comes 6. A. charge 　　　　B. pay 　　　　　 C. collect 　　　　　D. hand 7. A. possible 　　　　　B. necessary 　　 C. ordinary 　　　　 D. natural 8. A. might 　　　　 B. could 　　　　 C. would 　　　　 D. must 9. A. one 　　　　B. second 　　C. first 　　　　　　D. last 10. A. unless 　　　　　 B. once 　　　　　C. since 　　　　　　D. before 11. A. on 　　　　B. about 　　　　 C. for 　　　　　　　D. with 12. A. best 　　　　 B. worst 　　　　 C. greatest 　　　　 D. smartest 13. A. spare 　　　　B. fight 　　　　 C. share 　　　　　　D. agree 14. A. friends 　　　　　B. parents 　　　 C. teachers 　　　　 D. classmates 15. A. bringing 　　 B. picking 　　　 C. calling 　　　　　D. growing 二、阅读理解 A Shopping is not as simple as you may think! There are all sorts of tricks at play each time we reach out for that particular brand（品牌）of product on the shelf. Colouring, for example, varies according to what the producers are trying to sell. Health foods are packaged（包装）in greens, yellows or browns because we think of these as healthy colours. Ice cream packets are often blue and expensive goods, like chocolates, are gold or silver. When some kind of painkiller was brought out recently, researchers found that the colours turned the customers off because they made the product look weak and ineffective. Eventually（最后）, it came on the market in a dark blue and white package---blue because we think of it as safe, and white as calm. The size of a product can attract a shopper. But quite often a bottle doesn’t contain as much as it appears to. It is believed that the better-known companies spend, on average, 70 percent of the total cost of the product itself on packaging! The most successful producers know that it’s not enough to have a good product. The founder of Pears Soap, who for 25 year has used pretty little girls to promote（促销）their goods, came to the conclusion: “Any fool can make soap, but it takes a genius to sell it.” 1. Which of the following may trick a shopper into buying a product according to the　 　text? 　 A. The cost of its package　　　　　　　　B. The price of the product C. The colour of its package　　　　　 D. The brand name of the product 2. The underlined part “the colours turned the customers off” (in Para.3) means that the colours ________ . A. attracted the customers strongly　　　　　 B. had weak effects on the customers C. tricked the customers into shopping 　　　 D. caused the customers to lose interest 3. Which of the following is the key to the success in product sales? A. The way to promote goods.　　　　 　B. The discovery of a genius. C. The team to produce a good product　　 D. The brand name used by successful producers. 4. Which of the following would be the best title for this text? 　　A. Choice of Good Products.　　　　  　B. Disadvantages of Products. C. Effect of Packaging on Shopping.　　 　D. Brand Name and Shopping Tricks. B 　　　Michael, a typical American, stays home on workdays. He plugs into his personal computer terminal (终端机) in order to connect with the office. After work, he puts on his headphones, watches a movie on his home video recorder, or plays baseball on the computer. On many days, Michael doesn’t talk to any other human beings, and he doesn’t see any people except the ones on television. Michael is imaginary, but his lifestyle is very possible. The inventions of modern technology seem to be cutting us off from meeting our fellow human beings. 　　 The world of business is one area in which technology is isolating us. Experts say, for example, that many people will soon be able to work at home. By making use of a large central computer, employees such as office clerks, and accountants (会计) could do their jobs at display terminals in their own homes. They would never have to actually see the people they’re dealing with. In addition, the way employees are paid will change. Workers’ salaries will be automatically paid into their bank accounts, making paper checks unnecessary. No workers will stand in line to receive their pay or exchange their checks for money. Personal banking will change, too. Customers will deal with machines to put in or take out money from their accounts. 　　 Another area that technology is changing is entertainment. Music, for example, was once a group experience. People listened to music at concert halls or in small social gatherings. For many people now, however, music is an individual experience. Walking along the street or sitting in their living rooms, they wear headphones to build a wall of music around them. Movie entertainment is changing, too. Movies used to be social events. Now, fewer people are going out to see a movie. Many more are choosing to wait for a film to appear on television or are borrowing videotapes to watch at home. Instead of laughing with others, viewers watch movies in their own living rooms. 5. After work, Michael likes to _________. 　　A. listen to music at the concert hall　　　 B. watch a movie in his living room 　　C. run a program on his computer in his office　D. play baseball with his workmates 6. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage? 　　A. Clerks will be able to work at home. 　　B. One can listen to music without disturbing others. 　　C. One can play baseball on the computer.　 　　D. One can borrow books from libraries at home. 7. What will the author most probably discuss after the last paragraph? 　　A. Games and sports.　　　　　　　　　 B. Personal banking.　 　　C. Music and films.　 　　　　　　　　 D. International business. 8. What is the main idea of the passage? 　　A. We may no longer need to communicate with other human beings. 　　B. Modern technology seems to be separating human beings. 　　C. We may no longer need to work in the office. 　　D. Modern technology makes it possible for us to work and entertain ourselves at　 　　　 home. 9th period　Task (1) 双基提要 1. Words: plot, solve, manage, peaceful 2. Phrases: in the distance, finish university, set sail for, go missing, sound like 课堂反馈 一、单词拼写 根据首字母或中文提示完成下列单词。 1. She spent several weeks __________（策划）a story. 2. Charlie thinks money will _________（解决）all his problems. 3. We had a __________（平静的）afternoon without the children. 4. My cousin is studying physics at Oxford U____________. 5. I finally m___________ to push the huge animal away.  二、阅读理解 Have you ever heard your own voice？“Of course,” you say. Has anyone else ever heard your voice？Again you say, “Of course.” But that’s not quite true. Nobody else has ever heard your voice---the way you hear it. When you talk, you set up sound waves. The air outside your head carries the sound waves to your outer ears. But, of course, the sound of your voice begins inside your head. The bones of your head pick up the sound waves, too. They carry the sound waves straight to your inner ears. You get the sound from the outside and the inside too. Other people get just the sound waves from the outside. That is why they don’t hear your voice the way you do. 1. You ________ hear your voice the same way others hear it. 　　 　A. can’t　　　 　　 B. seldom　　　 　　 C. sometimes 　　 　 D. always 2. Sound travels in the form of __________. 　　 　A. bones 　　　　 B. air 　　　　　　　　　C. waves 　　　　 　 D. voice 3. When you talk, sound waves are set up inside _________. 　　A. your inner ears　 B. your outer ears　　　 C. your head 　　 D. your head bones 4. The underlined phrase “pick up” here means _________. 　　　 A. to raise　　　　　 　 B. to gain　　 　　　　　C. to select　　 　　D. to pull 5. The passage is mainly about __________. 　　　 A. waves in the air　　　　　　　 B. the way you hear your own voice 　　　 C. voice spreading far and wide　　 　 D. the different way people hear their voices 巩固练习 一、完形填空 　　Some thirty years ago, I was studying in a public school in New York. One day, Mrs. Nanette O’neill gave an arithmetic 　1　 for our class. When the papers were 　2　  she discovered that twelve boys had made exactly 　3　 mistakes throughout the test. 　　There is nothing really new about cheating in exams. Perhaps that was why Mrs. O’neill didn’t even say a word about it. She only asked the twelve boys to 　4　 after class. I was one of the twelve. Mrs. O’Neill asked 　5　 questions, and she didn’t scold either. Instead, she wrote on the blackboard the 　6　 words by Tomas Macaulay. She then ordered us to 　7　 there words into our exercise books one hundred times. 　　I don’t know about the other eleven boys. Speaking for 　8　 I can say it was the most important single 　9　 of my life. Thirty years after being 　10　 to Macaulay’s words, they still seem to me the best yardstick, because they gave us a 　11　 to measure ourselves rather than others. 　　　12　 of us are asked to make 　13　 decisions about nations going to war or armies going to battle. But all of us are called 　14　 daily to make a great many personal decisions. 　15　 the wallet, found in the street, be pulled into a pocket 　16　 turn over to the policeman? Should the 　17　 change received at the store be forgotten or 　18　? Nobody will know except 　19　. But you have to live with yourself, and it is always 　20　 to live with someone you respect. 1. A. test　　　B. problem　　　 C. paper　　　　 D. lesson 2. A. examined　B. completed　　 C. marked　　　　D. answered 3. A. easy　　　B. funny　　　　 C. same　　　　　D. serious 4. A. come 　　 B. leave　　　　 C. remain　　　　D. apologize 5. A. no 　　　 B. certain　　　 C. many　　　　　D. more 6. A. above 　　B. common　　　　C. following　　 D. unusual 7. A. repeat　　B. get　　　　　 C. put　　　　　 D. copy 8. A. myself　　B. ourselves　　 C. themselves　　D. herself 9. A. chance 　 B. incident　　　C. lesson　　　　D. memory 10. A. referred B. shown　　　　 C. brought　　　 D. introduced 11. A. way　　　B. sentence　　　C. choice　　　　D. reason 12. A. All 　　 B. Few　　　　　 C. Some　　　　　D. None 13. A. quick 　 B. wise　　　　　C. great　　　　 D. personal 14. A. out　　　B. for　　　　　 C. up　　　　　　D. upon 15. Should 　　 B. Must　　　　　C. Would　　　　 D. Need 16. A. and　　　B. or　　　　　　C. then　　　　　D. but 17. A. extra　　B. small　　　　 C. some　　　　　D. necessary 18. A. paid　　 B. remembered　　C. shared　　　　D. returned 19. A. me 　　　B. you　　　　　 C. us　　　　　　D. them 20. A. easier　 B. more natural　C. better　　　　D. more peaceful 二、阅读理解 A 　　Mr. Smith is well-known in Washington because of his many social blunders（大错，失误）. He always likes to attend the various social functions because he wants to expand his circle of friend. Whenever he is invited, he goes, unless he is ill. 　　Recently he received an invitation to a fashionable banquet（宴会）. Although he did not know the hostess, he accepted then invitation. He was secretly very pleased, because he felt that his reputation as a desirable guest was growing. When he arrived at the banquet, he found that about one hundred people had been invited. He began to move around then hall. He spoke to other guests whether he knew them or not. He soon realized that he had never met any of then people present, although they seemed to know each other. At dinner, he was seated beside a very dignified（尊贵的） woman. The woman tried to be friendly even though she has never met Mr Smith before. She spoke politely, whenever he spoke to her. Between the first and the second course（一道菜） of the meal, she turned to Mr. Smith and said, “Do you see that gray-haired man at the end of the table? The one with the glasses.” “Ah, yes. Who is he?” asked Smith. “He’s the Secretary of the Interior!” she replied. Mr Smith said, “So that’s the Secretary of the Interior! I’m afraid that I find very little to admire about him, although he is the Secretary.” The woman stiffened（身体变僵硬） and did not reply. Smith continued in spite of her coldness. “I really can not see how he received his appointment, unless he is perhaps a relative of the President.” “It hardly matters whether you like the Secretary or not,” she said. “He was chosen because the President thought he was the man for the job. If he does the job well, you should have no complain.” “That’s just it,” persisted（坚持） Smith. “No one does the things he does, unless he is a complete fool!” “Sir!” said the woman in all her dignity. “Do you know who I am?” “No!” replied Smith. “I am the Secretary’s wife,” she said coldly. Mr Smith was flabbergasted（目瞪口呆的）, but he wet on in spite of his embarrassment. “Madam, do you know who I am?” “No, I don’t.” the woman replied. “Thank goodness!” exclaimed Mr Smith, as he quickly left the table. A) 阅读短文，判断下列句子的正（T）误（F）。 1. Mr Smith is good at communicating with others. 2. He likes to attend all kinds of banquets even if he is ill. 3. This story happened in the common family party. 4. At that party, Mr Smith knew everyone well. B）根据短文内容，回答问题。 5. Why is Mr Smith famous in Washington? 6. Why does he like to attend all kinds of social functions? 7. Who sat beside her at dinner? 8. What’s the relationships between the woman and the secretary? 9. In Mr Smith’s opinion, how to get the position? B THE BERMUDA TRIANGLE 　　Mr. Smith is well-known and been convinced (使确信) that it has mysteriously vanished? Usually, you find out that there was a perfectly good explanation for how it was lost and there was nothing mysterious happening at all. 　　However, some planes and boats have vanished from a place called the Bermuda Triangle (百幕大三角) and, although a few have escaped or been found again, many seem to be lost forever. Their stories seem unbelievable but it’s true. Bermuda is a collection of very small islands on the North American side of the Atlantic Ocean. The heart if the Bermuda Triangle lies between Bermuda, Florida and Puerto Rico (these are the three points of the triangle) but its ill effects seem to stretch across the Sargasso Sea and as far as Barbados. 　　Sailors have feared the Sargasso Sea for centuries. The sea takes its name from a strange red seaweed called Sargasso, that covers its surface. Sailors used to terrify their fellow seamen by telling tales of ships’ graveyard within the Sargasso Sea. Trapped by the seaweed and the lack of wind, ships were said to sail on for centuries—never to escape. Where Things That Happened 1. ____________________________ Planes and boats have disappeared. In the Sargasso Sea 2. __________ stopped ships from escaping. 10th Period　Task 双基提要 1. Words: progress, muscle, temporarily, fly, treatment, hopefully, accept , method, tap,　 　　　  display, whisper 2. Phrases: make great progress, fly away, look out, stare out , turn to, come close, feel sleepy 课堂反馈 一、单词拼写　根据首字母或中文提示完成下列单词。 1. He has made great p_______ in Chinese since he came to China. 2. H ______, the building will be finished next week if it doesn’t rain. 3. The products of this company are usually f_______ abroad. 4. Regular exercise will help to strengthen your m_________ . 5. Li Yang invented a good m_____ of learning English. 6. Leaving home was only a ____________（临时）solution to the problem. 7. He has tried lots of _________（治疗）for his illness, but useless. 8. They sat at the back of the room, talking in __________（低语）. 9. The students’ works　were ____________（展览）on the wall. 10. I received his gift yesterday but I didn’t __________（接受）it. 二、单项选择 1. In hilly, dry or mountainous areas where it is impossible to grow crops, it makes very　 　 　good ________ to keep sheep or goats. 　　A. sense　　　　　B senses　　　　　C reason　　　　　D reasons 2. The bus didn’t arrive on time. Timmy waited anxiously and _______his watch from 　time to time. 　　A. stared at　　　B glared at　  　 C glanced at　　 D. sneered at 3. To solve the problem of feeding the world, scientists are developing new types of plants　　 　which are less likely to be _________by pests and diseases. 　　A. attracted　　 B attacked　　　　C. accepted　　 　D. accessed 4. Chuck _____to land on a ________island where there were no people and made friends 　 with a volleyball called Wilson. 　　A. tried; deserting　　　　　　　　B. managed; deserted　 　　C. succeeded; deserted　　　　　　 D. managed; desert 5. He couldn’t help ________the house, because he was busy cleaning the car. 　　A. cleaning　　　　　B. to clean　　C. cleaned　　 　D. being cleaning 巩固练习 一、完形填空 阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从1-20各题所给的四个选项中选出最佳答案。 　　The woman’s college had a very small car-park, and 　1　 several of the teachers and students, and many of the students’ boy friends had cars, it was often difficult to find a place to 　2　. The head of the college, 　3　 name was Miss Baker, therefore had a special place in the car-park for her 　4　 car. There were white lines round it, and it had a notice 　5　, “Place for Head of College.” 　　One evening, however, when Miss Baker got back to the college a few minutes 　6　 the time 　7　 which all students had to be in, she found 　8　 car in her 　9　. There were two people in it, one of her girl students and a young man. Miss Baker knew that the young man would have to 　10　 very soon, so she 　11　 to ask him to move his car a bit, so that she could park 　12  in the proper place for the 　13　 before going to bed. 　　As the young man’s car was close to the railing (栅栏), Miss Baker had to drive up beside it on the other side, 　14　the girl was sitting. She 　15　 came up on this side, 　16   her own window and tapped her horn lightly to 　17　 attention to the fact that she was there. The girl, who had her head on the boy’s shoulder, 　18　 in surprise, she was 　19　 more surprised when she 　20　 Miss Baker say, “Excuse me, but may I change places with you?” 1. A. for　　　　 　　　 B. as　　　  C. with　　　　 　D. to 2. A. stop　　　　　　　 B. drive　　　　　C. stay　　　　 　D. park 3. A. with　　　　　　　 B. which　　 C. whose　　　 　 D. her 4. A. own　　　　　　B. students’　 　C. teachers’　　 　 D. herself 5. A. said　　　　　　　 B. telling　　　　C. saying　　　　 D. speaking 6. A. before　　　　　　 B. in　　　　　　 C. on　　　　　 　D. just 7. A. at　　　　  　　　 B. by　　 　　C. till　　　　　 　 D. through 8. A. her　　　　　　B. little　　　 　C. other　　　　 D. another 9. A. parking place　　　B. schoolyard　　 C. house　　　  　D. garden 10. A. run　　　　　  B. leave　　　 　C. flee　　　　 　D. stand 11 A. was　　　　　 B. was asking　 　C. would begin　　D. decided 12. A. his　　　　　  　 B. hers　　　　　 C. there　　　　 D. where 13. A. rest　　　　　 　 B. day　　　　 　 C. night　　　　 D. lesson 14. A. where　　　　 　　B. because　　　　C. though　　　 　D. even if 15. A. so　　　　　  　　B. therefore　　 C. also　　　　  D. maybe 16. A. broke　　　　 　　B. looked at　　 C. opened　　　 　D. closed 17. A. draw　　　　  　　B. pay　　　　 　 C. pay for　　　 D. be 18. A. looked out　　 　 B. looked around　　 C. looked down　　D. looked ahead 19. A. further　　　　 　B. much　　　 　　C. far　　　 　　 D. even 20. A. saw　　　　　 　　B. made　　　　　 C. heard　　　　 D. let 三．阅读理解 A People living in different countries made different kinds of words. Today there are about fifteen hundred languages in the world. Each contains (包括) many thousands of words. But we do not need all these. To read short stories, you need to know only about two thousand words. Before you leave school, you will learn only one thousand more. The words you know are called your vocabulary (词汇). You should try to make your vocabulary bigger. Read as many books as you can. There are plenty of books written in easy English for you to read. You will enjoy them. When you meet a new word, find it in your dictionary. Your dictionary is your most useful book. 1. The number of different languages spoken is about _______. A. 150　　　 B. 1500　　　 　　C. 500　　　 D. 15000 2. Before you leave your school, you’ll learn _____. 　　A. only about two thousand words　 　　B. five hundred thousand words C. three or four thousand words　　　　D. only one thousand more 3. Each language usually contains __________. A. two thousand words　　　　　　　B. hundreds of words 　　C. different kinds of words　　 　　　 D. many thousands of words 4. To make your vocabulary bigger, you must ___________. A. read as many books as possible　　　B. get as many dictionaries as you can 　　C. buy plenty of books　　　　　　 　　D. have a very large English dictionary　 5. You will enjoy _____________. A. your vocabulary　　　　　　　　 B. the books written in easy English 　　C. your dictionary　　　　 　　　　D. finding new words in a dictionary B 　　Do you have bright ideas? Ideas or inventions that change society or, at least, make life easier for somebody? Perhaps we all do sometimes, but we don’t often make the idea a reality. Recently, in Britain, there was a competition called British Designers for Tomorrow. The competition encourages young people to carry out their bright ideas. There were two groups in the contest; Group One was for schoolchildren under 16; Group Two was for schoolchildren over 16. And there were eleven prize-winners altogether. Neil Hunt, one of the prize-winners, was called “Sunshine Superman(超人)”. It’s important when people study the weather to be able to record sunshine accurately. We need to know how many hours of sunshine we have and how strong it is. Most sunshine recorders only record direct sunlight. Neil’s is more accurate(精确的) and this is very important for research into the way of using solar(太阳的)power. You can do so much with animated cartoon. Look at Simon West’s idea for animated road signs. He uses pictures which appear to move as you go nearer to or farther from them. This isn’t a new idea. But it is new to use these pictures on road signs. “We found that people were more likely to see moving signs,” said Simon. So now, you can really see rocks falling, trains moving , horses running or a car falling over the edge of a cliff (悬崖). Quite a warning! The ideas in the competition were so inventive that we are surprised that British industry doesn’t ask more schoolchildren for suggestions. Perhaps this will be the start of “pupil power!” 6. The writer holds that people seldom _____________. 　　A. have bright ideas　　　 　　　　　　B. turn their bright ideas into reality 　 C. make their life easier　　　　　　　　 D. think of inventing something 7. The organizers of the competition hoped the schoolchildren who took part in it would  ____________. A. become good designers for future Britain　　 B. invent something for immediate use C. design something useful for the next day　　 D. win as many prizes as they could 8. Neil Hunt’s design would finally lead to the improvement of the way of ___________. 　 A. recording direct sunshine　　　　　　　B. recording the hours of sunshine 　 C. using the energy of the sun　　　 　　 D. knowing how strong sunlight is 9. What’s the use of Simon West’s animated road signs? 　 A. To warn people to be careful while working. 　 B. To warn people on the roads of the danger ahead. 　 C. To add to the beauty of a city. 　 D. To help make a car trip more exciting. 10. The writer seems to be encouraging the British industry to ___________. 　 A. take better care of schoolchildren　　 B. help schoolchildren in their studies 　 C. stop asking schoolchildren for suggestions 　 D. pay more attention to schoolchildren’s inventive power 11th Period　 Project (1) 双基提要 1. Words: attack, report, fierce, deadly, likely, wound, lightning, distance , panic 2. Phrases: compare to, feed on, human beings, great white shark, tiger shark, bull shark 课堂反馈 一、根据首字母提示，补全下列句子中的单词。 1. According to the latest weather report, a f________ storm is on its way. 2. His wife died in a traffic accident, which was a d_________ attack to him. 3. As the result of l_________ strike, the electricity supply was cut off. 4. People ran away in p­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­_______ as soon as the building caught fire. 5. D_________ is no longer a problem since the Internet was born. 6. It is l______ that the sports meeting will be put off due to the bad weather. 7. They were f___________ well on her mother’s home cooking. 8. She felt deeply_____________(受伤) by his cruel remarks. 9. This is Gavin Williams, ___________（报道）from the United Nations in New York. 10. ____________（比较）to our small flat, Bill’s house seemed like a palace. 二、根据以下电子邮件内容，完成表格。 Dear Steve, I’m going to study in Chicago University in September, so I have to find a room to live in. I need to share the things in the house. Because housing is so expensive in Chicago, please find a room at lower price ( about 200 dollars a month ), for it is not easy for me, a first year student, to find a good part-time job soon. Please email me if you have anything. My email address is I hope to see you soon. Love, Diana Rental Agency (租赁公司）Information Form Name: ______________________ Add/Email: __________________________________ Type of housing: House(  )  Apartment (  )  Room(  ) Living style: Shared(  )  Alone (  ) Price (per month ): ________________________   巩固练习 一、完形填空 In Europe, men do not usually wear skirts. 　1　 the Scottish national costume(服装) for 　2　 is a kind of skirt. It is called a kilt. The Scottish like to be 　3　. They are also proud of their country and its 　4　, and they feel that the kilt is part of that history. That’s why the men still wear kilts at old -style 　5　 and on national holidays. They believe they are wearing the same clothes as Scottish men 　6　 to wear. That’s what they believe. 　7　, kilts are not really so old. 　8　1730, Scottish men wore a long shirt and 　9　 around their shoulders. These clothes got in the way when the men started to work in 　10　. So, in 1730 a factory owner changed the blanket into a shirt: the kilt. That’s 　11　  the first kilt was made. Then, in the late 1700s Scottish soldiers in the 　12　 Army began to wear kilts to be different from British soldiers. The Scottish soldiers 　13　  very hard and became famous. The kilt was part of that 　14　, and in the early 1800s men all around Scotland began to wear kilts. These kilts had 　15　 stripes(条纹) going up and down and across. At first, the color of the stripes had no 　16　 meaning. But later the colors became important to the Scottish 　17　. Each had their special colors. This is not the 　18　 you will hear today if you are in Scotland. Most Scottish people still believe that kilts are as 　19　 as Scotland and that the colors are as old as the Scottish families. Sometimes feelings are stronger than 　20　. 1. A. And　　　　  　B. But　　　　　 C. So　　　　 　　D. Although 2. A. women　　　　  B. girls　　　　　　 　　C. men　　　　  　D. boys 3. A. different　　　　　B. same　　　　　  　C. important　 　 D. beautiful 4. A. clothes　　　　  　B. language　　　　　C. kilt　　　　　 D. history 5. A. meetings　　　　　 B. weddings　　　　　C. dances　　　　 D. burials 6. A. liked　　　　　  B. preferred　　　 　　C. hated　　　　 D. used 7. A. Actually　　　　　 B. Therefore　　　 　C. However　　　　D. Hopefully 8. A. After　　　　 B. Before　　　　　　C. In　　　 　　　D. Since 9. A. cloth　　　　 B. dress　　　　 　　C. scarf　　　　 D. blanket 10. A. factories　 　　　B. companies　　　　 C. fields　　　　 D. offices 11. A. when　　　　　B. where　　　　　　 C. how　　　　 　 D. why 12. A. Scottish　　　　　B. British　　　　　　　 C. European　　　 D. American 13. A. studied　　 　　　B. quarreled　　 　　C. worked　　　 　D. fought 14. A. army　　 　　 B. fight　　　　　 　C. fame　　　　 　D. victory 15. A. colorful　　　　　B. beautiful　　　　　　 C. bright　　　  D. simple 16. A. important　　 　　B. special　　　　　 C. helpful　 　　 D. clear 17. A. country　　　 　　B. people　　　　　　C. soldiers　　　 　 D. families 18. A. story　　　　 B. history　　　　　　　 C. fact　　　　  D. news 19. A. important　 　B. beautiful　　　 　C. different　　　　 D. old 20. A. brains　　　　 　 B. senses　　　　　　C. facts　　　　　D. stories 二、阅读理解 A You might think that “sodbusters” are tools. You’d be almost right. Sodbusters, however, were actually people. In the late 1800s, many people moved to the Midwest to settle on land that the United States government had offered for free. Upon arriving, the settlers found that there were no trees for building shelters. The ground, however, had a thick layer of knotted, matted roots below the grassy surface. This kind of soil is called sod. The early settlers cut the sod into large cubes. Then they used the cubes of sod to build their shelters. The settlers also had to break up the vast areas of hard sod so that they could farm the land.　For these reasons, settlers in the Midwest became known as “sodbusters.” 1. The best title is _____________. A. Who the Sodbusters Were　　　 　　　B. Farming in the Midwest C. Building a Shelter　　　　　　  　　　 D. How to Cut Sod 2. People moved to the Midwest to ___________. A. find gold　　　B. look for water　　　　C. settle the land　　D. find adventure 3. Before they could farm the land, the settlers ____________. A. broke up sod  B. built barns　　 　　　C. dug up roots　　 D. cut down trees 4. The settlers in the Midwest must have ____________. A. wanted to hunt 　 B. been lazy　　　　 C. wanted to stay　　D. been bored 5. The word “matted” in line six means ____________. A. grassy　　 　　B. tightly tangled　　　 C. curly　　　　　　D. soft B Have you ever imagined what it would have been like to go on an old-time western cattle drive? The early cattle drives were long and hard---and sometimes even dangerous. They took place because Texas ranchers wanted to get their beef cattle to people in northern cities. Railroads used for carrying the cattle did not go all the way into Texas at that time, however. The ranchers decided to solve their problem by hiring workers, called cowhands, to take the cattle to the railroad stops in Missouri, Kansas, and Colorado. The long cattle drives ended when the railroad lines were extended into Texas and other western lands. 6. The best title is ___________. A. Cowhands　　　　　　　  　　 B. How to Drive Cattle 　C. The Texas Cattle Drives　　 　　D. The Texas Ranchers 7. Ranchers wanted to sell their cattle to people _________. 　A. in the North　　B. in Missouri　　 C. in the South　　 D. on the plains 8. The workers who rode with the cattle were called __________. 　A. railroad workers 　　　　　　B. ranchers　　 C. cowhands　　 　　　　　　　 D. horseback riders 9. The story suggests that cattle drives ____________. 　A. were exciting　　　　 　　　　　B. took a few days　　 C. covered many miles　　　　　　　D. are still common 10. The underlined word “extended” means __________. A. broken up　　B. made longer　　 C. torn apart　　　D. straightened out 三、短文填空　选择文本框中的单词，并用其适当形式填空。 be,　study,　well,  surprise,　loud   Dear Lisa, How are you? Do you still feel frustrated about your illness? Now I want to tell you a story about a blind teacher. Maybe you can learn something from her. At the beginning of this term, she came to teach us. She felt afraid at first but she spoke as 　1　 as she could to the class. She could hear what we were doing. She gave us lots of 　2　 later. Soon we stopped 　3　 naughty and started to work hard. The teacher was not blind when she was born. She was ill at the age of nine months. Since then, her eyes had never been 　4　. When she was nine, she could not see anything at all. She tried to become a teacher. It was not easy for her because most teachers’ colleges didn’t agree to take her in and she found it very difficult to get a job even after she finished 　5　 at a college. Do you think she is very brave? So don’t be afraid. I am sure with the doctor’s help, you will get better soon. Wish to hear the good news from you!　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　　　  　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 Yours, 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  Nancy 1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. ________ 5. ________ 12th Period　Project (2) 双基提要 1. Words: type, movie, chance, drown, latter, shiny, avoid, tip, panic, stick, lightning 2. Phrases: in this way, over a long distance, follow the advice 3. Sentences: 　When attacking in this way, the shark waits for you to swim by … 课堂反馈 一、单词拼写　根据首字母或中文提示补全下列单词。 1. She wore a fashionable jacket and high s__________ boots. 2. In those days, we went to the m____________ every week. 3. Her little brother d__________ while swimming alone last year. 4. It is important to take measures to a___________ the risk of fire. 5. There was a great summer storm, with thunder and l___________ and heavy rain. 6. What t___________ of music do you like? 7. Jill knows Spain really well. Perhaps she could give us a few t__________. 8. She got into a ____________（惊慌）when she couldn't find the tickets. 9. The young lady likes wearing a lot of gold _____________（珠宝）. 10. The day will be cloudy with a slight _________（可能性）of rain later tonight. 二、短文改错 When I walked into the classroom, the teacher was handing in the test papers. I was feeling nervous. I had not studied　　　　　1. _________ at all at the weekend, as I had thought it would be easy test.　　　 2. _________ I went through the test for many times but I could only answer　　 　 3. _________ three out from the twenty questions. I did not want to fail　　 　　　4. _________ the exam. Then, I put my book under my desk, opening it　　　 5. _________ and started looking for the answer. The teacher wasn’t　　　　 　 6. _________ looking at me, and I copied something. Suddenly I felt a hand　　 7. _________ on my shoulder! The teacher caught me cheating. I don’t　　　　　 8. _________ know what to say. Unluckily, the teacher did not punish me　　　　 9. _________ for cheating but instead of gave me a second chance.　　　　 　　　10. _________ 巩固练习 一、完形填空　 Walking through any high school during the first class in the morning, you may find that many students are struggling to keep their 　1　 up. “They’re sitting in the classroom, 　2　 their heads are at home on their pillows (枕头),” says Mary Carskadon of Brown Medical School in the US. Don’t blame yourself; blame the 　3　 in your brain. Two decades of research 　4　 that your bodies are pushing you to stay up at night and 　5　 into the morning.   6　 the first several weeks of school, students are more likely to get a lack of 　7　. In the holidays, 　8　 students can sleep over eight hours a night. But during the school day, students 　9　 sleeps only about six hours. Students will  10  10 hours of sleep per week that they never recover from. The lack of sleep  11  not only be a drag on school performance, but also be related to  12   health. Scientists in the US led research to try to  13  teenagers’ clocks back to help them fall asleep earlier. They use a special  14  in the classroom to try to force a reset of the students’ biological clock. They found the brain can  15  a chemical that helps sleep.  16  comes out only in the dark. The research  17  at the end. Doctor said that  18  the chemical had started flowing, the kids’ homework and other activities meant they stayed up at night. Some schools have reset their school time from 7:25 to 8:30 am to suit the students. The results were so  19  that students who had the hour extension (延长) of sleep performed best in tests. Those who lost the hour did  20  of all. 1. A. hands 　　　B. heads 　　　　 C. eyes 　　　　　D. arms 2. A. but 　　　　B. and 　　　　　 C. or 　　　　D. so 3. A. thoughts 　 B. dreams 　　C. clock 　　　　 D. energy 4. A. advises 　　　 B. allows 　　C. admits 　　D. suggests 5. A. lie 　　　　B. stand 　　　　 C. sit 　　　　　 D. sleep 6. A. While 　　　B. During 　　C. Within 　　D. As 7. A. money 　　　B. homework 　　　C. sleep 　　　　 D. time 8. A. mostly 　　 B. almost 　　C. most 　　　　　D. more 9. A. above all 　B. on average 　　C. in fact 　　　 D. after all 10. A. lose 　　　B. miss 　　　　　C. forget 　　D. reduce 11. A. should 　　　 B. may 　　　　　 C. must 　　　　　D. can 12. A. strong 　　　 B. good 　　　　　C. poor 　　　　　D. weak 13. A. record 　　　 B. reset 　　　　 C. remark 　　D. rewind 14. A. light 　　 B. chair 　　　　 C. pencil 　　D. desk 15. A. start 　　 B. produce 　　　 C. create 　　D. grow 16. A. They 　　　B. It 　　　　C. He 　　　　D. She 17. A. lost 　　　B. succeeded 　　 C. failed 　　　　D. missed 18. A. since 　　 B. because 　　　 C. while 　　　　 D. even if 19. A. surprising 　 B. promising 　　 C. interesting 　　　D. frightening 20. A. better 　　　 B. worse 　　 C. worst 　　　　 D. best 二、阅读理解　 A close friend of mine lives with six hundred wild animals on the Greek Island of Kyklos. Ever since he left school（where I first knew him）he has travelled all over the world collecting animals for his very own zoo. He hoped to collect at least two examples of every sort of animal on his island，like Noah before the Great Flood. But the flood that my friend was afraid of，was a flood not of water，but of people. I expect you have heard of my friend: he writes books about his travels，and about the wild and wonderful animals that he collects. The money from the books helps to pay for all the food that these animals eat. My friend told me that when he was out looking for water last week，（there is not enough water on the island，though there is plenty all around it），he found oil. He needs money for his travels，and for his zoo，and a little oil would buy enough water for a life-time；but he knows that if he tells anybody else about it，it will be the end of his zoo，and his life’s work. So, if I know my friend，he will not tell anybody（but you and me）about what he found---because oil and water do not mix. 1. My friend lives _______________. A. on an island in the middle of great flood B. at the school that we used to go to, on Kyklos C. on a Greek Island with six hundred animals D. all over the world；he is always travelling 2. Since he left school _____________. A. he has collected books about every sort of animal B. he has lived in zoos all over the world C. he has lived all the time on a Greek Island D. he has travelled all over the world collecting animals 3. He pays for the food the animals eat by ____________. A. collecting two examples of every animal B. travelling all over the world C. writing books D. selling the oil on his island 4. Last week my friend ____________. A. found enough water on his island to last a life-time B. was looking for water，and found oil C. found plenty of oil all round the island D. went out looking for oil to pay for his travels 5. If he tells anybody about the oil ____________. A. it will be the end of his life’s work B. he will have as many animals as he needs C. he will not write any more books D. people will no longer come and visit his zoo 三、书面表达 下面六幅图描述了你们在4月23日星期日下午进行足球比赛过程中发生的事，请根据图画内容用英语写一篇日记。 注意：1、日记必须包括所有图画内容，可适当增加细节使日记连贯； 2、字数：80-120词。 3、开头已给出。 April 23rd　　  Sunday　　　　  Fine 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　    　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  　　　　 参考答案 1st Period, Unit 1 Module 3 课堂反馈 一、1. affect　2. failed　3. sense　4. achieve　5. confuse 二、译文： 我的五种感觉 我是某个人！ 我可以用我的眼睛看。 我看到青蛙在跳跃。 我可以用我的耳朵听。 我听到鸟儿在歌唱。 我可以用我的鼻子闻。 玫瑰闻起来很棒。 我可以用我的舌头尝。 糖果尝起来很甜。 我可以用我的手触摸。 冰块感觉很凉。 不论我做什么，我都用我的五种感觉。 巩固练习 一、1. Name　2. look　3. feel　4. hear　 5. sound　 6. feels　7. tastes　8. smell　9. hungry　10. senses 二、1-4 TTFF　5-8　CDBC　9-11　CDA  12. Because of an illness.　 　　13. Anne Sullivan.　 14. The last week of June every year. 15. To increase public awareness and understanding of deaf-blindness. 2nd Period 课堂反馈 1. watch out for　2. reached out　3. was frozen with　4. in sight　5. getting –across 6. wish for　7. is related to　8. make sense　9. glanced at　 10. pay back　 11. make the most of　 12. can’t help 巩固练习 一、1. observing　2. beating　3. treatment　4. hopeful 　5. ignored　 6. whispering　7. accepted 二、1. At　2. on　3. with　4. for　 5. into　6. to /with　7. at　8. for　 9. as　 10. on 三、 1. According to the weather report, it is likely to be raining next morning. 2. I often wonder if/whether animals have the same senses as humans. 3. I saw an old man making his way in the street, with a walking stick in his hand. 4. By the time he was 20 years old, he had finished writing two novels. 5. When they realized that they got lost, the children couldn’t help crying. 6. She sensed that she was being watched by someone. However, when she looked back, the person was nowhere to be seen. 7. When she came to, she found herself lying in hospital . 8. Once in bed, the children will fall asleep very soon. 9. My computer was attacked by an unknown virus last Sunday. So it has been broken for a whole week now. 10. Our problem is that so far we haven’t found out a right method to work out the difficulty. 四、　1. B　2. E　3. C　4. F　5. D 3rd Period 随堂反馈 一、1.weatherman　2. darkness　3. confident　4.distance 5. rare　6. experiments 7. destination  8. deserted 二、1-4 CABB 巩固练习 1-5 AACBB  6-10　BAACC　11-15 DAABA　 16-20　ACABA 4th Period 随堂反馈 1-5　ACBDB 巩固练习 1-5 BCDA A　6-10 DA CAB　 11-14　CAAA 5th Period 随堂反馈 I.　　 1. seated　　 　　　 2. plant　　　3. to water　 4. straight　　　 5. questioned 6. experienced 　 7. packing　　8. back　　　 9. heading　　　 10. close II.　 1. 　A: 今天天气真好，是不是? B: 是的,一点也不像收音机里说的那样。 A: 但愿整个周末都能保持这样的好天气。 B: 只要不下雪就行啊 2. 多糟(好)的天气！　 3. 华北、华南大部将是冷湿天气。 4. 有时天气将多云(有雨)。 5. 白天气温在零度以上，夜间又降到零度以下。 6. 天气转好／愈来愈坏。 巩固练习 1-4 ADBB　　 5-8 CCBA　　9-13　BADAA 6th Period 随堂反馈 一、1-5 CBBBA 二、1. why　2. where　3. what　 4. whether; what　5. what; whether　　 6. what; / 　7. That　 8. that 巩固练习 一、1-5　AADBA　6-10 CBADC　11-15　ACADD　16-20 AABDC　 21-25 DCAAC  26-30 BBACD 二、1. That　2. Whether　3. Which　4. What　5. That　6. that　7. why　 8. Whoever　9. that　10. when　11. What　12. What　13. That　14. Why　 15. Who　16. that　17. that　18. whether　19. whether　20. that 7th Period 随堂反馈 一、1. a. What　b. That　 2. a. Whether　b. if/ whether　3. what is the matter with you 4. has not been decided　5. you were in London 二、1. possibility　　2. explanation 　3. proved 　4. data　5. volunteers　 6. suggest　　7. added　8. related　9. linked　10. recognize 巩固练习 一、1-5　BDDAD　　6-10　BAABA　11-12 AC 二、that they could be the lucky customers;　what a notice inside the supermarket promised; that she had forgotten to buy some tea; what surprised her most 三、1-5 ACBDA　6-8  DBC 8th Period 课堂反馈 1-5　CBBAB　　　  6-10　BCCCC　　　11-14　ACCB 巩固练习 一、1-5  ABCAD  6-10  CDACB  11-15  BACBD 二、1-5　CDACB　 6-8　DAB 9th Period 课堂反馈 一、1. plotting 2. solve　3. peaceful　4. University　5. managed 二、1-5　ACCBB 巩固练习 一、1-5　ACCCA　6-10　ADACD　11-15　ABCDA　16-20 BADBC 二、A.　1-4  FFFF　5. Because of the many social blunders. 　　　 6. He wants to expand his circle of friend. 　　　 7. A very dignified woman. 　　　 8. Husband and wife. 　　　 9. Perhaps he is the relative of the President. 　　 B. 1. In the Bermuda Triangle　2. The seaweed and the lack of wind 10th Period 课堂反馈 一、1. progress　 2. Hopefully　　 3. flown　　 4. muscles　　　　5. method 6. temporary  7. treatments　　 8. whispers　 9. displayed　　　10. accept 二、1-5 ACBBB 巩固练习 一、1-5　BDDAB　　　 6-10　BACBD 11th Period 课堂反馈 一、1. fierce　2. deadly 3. lighting 4. panic 5. distance　6. likely 7. fed　8. hurt 9. reporting 10. Compared Rental Agency (租赁公司）Information Form Name: Diana Add/Email: Type of housing: House(  )  Apartment (  )  Room( √ ) Living style: Shared(  )  Alone (√ ) Price (per month ): 200 dollars   二、 巩固练习 一、1-5 BCADC　 6-10 DCBDA　 10-15 CBDCA　 16-20 BDADC 二、1-5 ACACB　6-10　CACCB 三、1. loud　2. surprise　3. being　 4. good　 5. studying 12th Period 课堂反馈 一、1. shiny　2. movies　3. drowned　4. avoid　5. lightning　6. type  7. tips 8. panic　9. jewelry 10. chance 二、 1.in →out  2. easy →an easy　3. 去掉for　4. from →of　5.opening →opened　 6. answer →answers　7. √　8. don’t →didn’t　9. Unluckily →Luckily 10. 去掉 of 巩固练习 一、1-5  BACDD  6-10  BCCBA  11-15  BCBAB  16-20  BCDBC 二、1-5　CDCBA 三、 April 23rd　　 Sunday　　 Fine This afternoon we had a football match. While I was running toward the ball, I fell over. I was hurt so badly that I could hardly stand up and my right leg hurt. Some of my classmates came up and helped me onto a bike. They took me to the nearest hospital. After examining me carefully, the doctor told me that there was nothing serious. After I was treated properly, I was allowed to go home, supported by my classmate.  It was a pity that I couldn’t play the match. But I was happy I had many friends to help me when I was in trouble. 江苏省南通市译林牛津版模块三Unit 2 Language备课材料 Period 1　Welcome to the unit Emoticons or smileys explained An Emoticon (or Smiley) is a sequence of ordinary characters you can find on your computer keyboard. Emoticons are used in e-mail, chat, SMS（短信） and other forms of communication using computers. The most popular emoticons are the smiling faces (smileys or smilies) that people use to say “don't take what I just wrote too seriously”. If you don't see that it represents a smiling face, tip your head to the left and look at it again. The colon represents the eyes, the dash represents the nose, and the right parenthesis represents the mouth. Many people use MSN and Yahoo, for this reason I added a list with MSN and Yahoo emoticons. When using these during your chat session, they will be converted to real icons. Emoticons（情感符） Emoticons (emotional icons) are used to compensate for the inability to convey voice inflections, facial expressions, and bodily gestures in written communication. Some emoticons are better known as “smileys”. Emoticons can be very effective toward avoiding misinterpretation of the writer’s intents. While there are no standard definitions for the following emoticons, we have supplied their most usual meanings. Most emoticons will look like a face (eyes, nose, and mouth) when rotated 90 degree clockwise. :) or :-) Expresses happiness, sarcasm, or joke :( or :-( Expresses unhappiness :] or :-] Expresses jovial happiness :[ or :-[ Expresses despondent unhappiness :D or :-D Expresses jovial happiness :I or :-I Expresses indifference :-/ or :-\ 　　Indicates undecided, confused, or skeptical. Also :/ or :\. :Q or :-Q Expresses confusion :S or :-S Expresses incoherence or loss of words :@ or :-@　Expresses shock or screaming :O or :-O Indicates surprise, yelling or realization of an error ("uh oh!") Acronyms（首字母缩略词） AAMOF 　as a matter of fact 　　　　　　BBFN 　bye bye for now BFN　　 bye for now 　　　　　　　　BTW 　 by the way BYKT 　 but you knew that 　　　　　　　CMIIW correct me if I'm wrong EOL 　　　 end of lecture 　　　　　　　　 FAQ 　 frequently asked question(s) FITB 　 fill in the blank 　　　　　　　FWIW 　for what it's worth FYI 　　　 for your information 　　　　　 HTH 　 hope this helps IAC 　　　 in any case 　　　　　　　　IAE 　 in any event ICL 　　　 in Christian love 　　　　　　　IMCO 　in my considered opinion IMHO 　 in my humble opinion 　　　　　 IMNSHO in my not so humble opinion IMO 　　　 in my opinion 　　　　　　　IOW　　in other words LOL 　　　 lots of luck or laughing out loud MGB 　 may God bless MHOTY 　my hat's off to you 　　　　　　NRN 　 no reply necessary OIC 　　　 oh, I see 　　　　　　　　　OTOH 　on the other hand ROF 　　　 rolling on the floor 　　　　　 ROFL 　rolling on the floor laughing ROTFL 　rolling on the floor laughing 　　 RSN　　real soon now SITD 　 still in the dark 　　　　　　　TIA 　 thanks in advance TIC 　　　 tongue in cheek 　　　　　　TTYL 　talk to you later TYVM 　 thank you very much 　　　　WYSIWYG what you see is what you get <G> 　　　 Grinning <J> 　　　　Joking <L>　　 Laughing <S> 　　　 Smiling <Y> 　　　 Yawning Sign Language For many years, no one could communicate with people who had been born without hearing. These deaf people were not able to use a spoken language. 　　But, beginning in the 1700s, the deaf were taught a special language. Using this language, they could share thoughts and ideas with others. The language they used was a language without sound. It was a sign language. 　　How did this sign language work? The deaf were taught to make certain movements using their hands, faces, and bodies. These movements stood for things and ideas. People might move their forefingers across their lips. This meant, “you are not telling the  truth.” They might tap their chins (下巴) with three fingers. This meant “my uncle.” The deaf were also taught to use a finger alphabet. They used their fingers to make the letters of the alphabet. In this way, they spelled out words. Some deaf people could spell out words at a speed of 130 words per minute. Sign language and finger spelling are not used as much as they once were. Today, the deaf are taught to understand others by watching their lips. They are also taught how to speak. Introduction to braille Louis Braille invented "braille", a world wide system of embossed type used by blind and partially sighted people for reading and writing. It has been adapted to almost every known language, from Albanian to Zulu. He died in 1852 and, for a while, it seemed as if this system would die with the inventor. Thankfully a few key people realised the importance of this invention. In 1868, Dr Thomas Armitage led a group of four blind men to found the British and Foreign Society for Improving the Embossed Literature of the Blind. This small band of friends grew and grew to become Royal National Institute of the Blind (RNIB). We are now the largest publisher of braille in Europe. Our pioneering work helps anyone with a sight problem - not just with braille, Talking Books and computer training, for example, but with imaginative and practical solutions to everyday challenges. Where does the story begin? Louis Braille was born in a small town near Paris in 1809. One day when Louis Braille was a small boy, he crept into his father's workshop to play. He had often seen his father making shoes and he decided he would like to try. He picked up an awl, a sharp, pointed tool used for making holes in leather. As he bent over, the awl slipped and pierced his eye, destroying it forever. Some time later his other eye became infected by the first and he lost his sight altogether. He was aged only 4, but still went on to become one of the most famous Frenchmen ever to live. Louis Braille's school years Despite his sight loss the young child attended the village school with his sighted friends for two years. Eventually it became clear that he would not be able to learn much more, largely because he could not read or write. Without an education it was likely that he would have to beg on the streets, like other blind people at that time. At the age of ten he was lucky enough to be sent to a school for blind boys in Paris, one of the first in the world. Conditions in the school were very harsh. The building was damp and unhealthy and discipline was severe. Pupils who misbehaved were beaten, locked up and given stale bread and water. In fact, this kind of discipline was common in all schools at that time. Life was harsh for nearly everyone and most sighted children left school at the age of 12 and went to work in factories or in mines. At the school in Paris the blind pupils were taught practical skills like chair caning and slipper making so that when they left the school they would be able to make a living. Once a week, after lunch, the boys were taken for a walk in the park, linked together by a long rope. They were also taught to read but not to write. The letters they read were raised above the surface of the page so that they could feel them with their fingertips. This form of writing was very difficult to read because it was very hard to tell the letters apart. The letters were printed by pressing copper wire into one side of the paper to make a raised shape on the other. Because each individual letter had to be made out of wire first and because the wire then had to be forced into the paper with a press blind people were unable to write anything for themselves. One day something happened that changed the lives of blind people forever. In 1821, a soldier named Charles Barbier visited Louis' school. He bought with him a system he had invented called "night writing". Night writing had originally been designed so that soldiers could pass instructions along trenches at night without having to talk and give their positions away. It consisted of twelve raised dots which could be combined to represent different sounds. Unfortunately it proved to be too complex for soldiers to master and was therefore rejected by the army. How did he develop braille? The young Louis Braille quickly realised how useful this system of raised dots could be, provided it was simplified. Over the next few months he experimented with different systems until he found an ideal system using six dots. He continued to work on the scheme for several years after, developing separate codes for maths and music. In 1827 the first book in braille was published. Even so, the new system did not catch on immediately. Sighted people did not understand how useful braille could be and one head teacher at the school even banned the children from learning it. Fortunately this seemed to have the effect of encouraging the children even more and they took to learning it in secret. Eventually even sighted people began to realise the benefits of the new system. Not only could people with sight problems read braille but they could also write it for themselves using a simple stylus to make the dots. For the first time blind and partially sighted people began to be truly independent and to take control of their own lives. What did he go on to do? Louis Braille eventually became a teacher in the school where he had been a student. He was admired and respected by his pupils but, unfortunately, he did not live to see his system widely adopted. He had always been plagued by ill health and in 1852, at the age of 43, he died from tuberculosis. In France itself, Louis Braille's achievement was finally recognised by the state. In 1952 his body was moved to Paris where it was buried in the Pantheon, the home of France's national heroes. Dance and communication Distance Information With increasing distance the number of circuits (8's) per unit time decreases and the length and duration of the individual circuits increases. For example, for a goal at 100 meters it makes 10 short circuits in 15 seconds but at 3 km only 3 long circuits in the same time. The duration of the wagging part has the best correlation with distance. The distance is calculated based on the expenditure of energy on the flight towards the source (a head-wind increases it). Each recruited bee averages many dance circuits or even several dances from different bees to calculate the distance. For each bee species a distance-frequency curve can be plotted.　It is remarkably precise, especially if the distance is not close to their foraging range limit. Compass Information If the dance floor is horizontal (the least common case in Nature), the indication of direction is straight-forward: the wagging (straight) portion of the eight-figure dance points towards the food source (and in the same direction as the bee runs through it). But, what does the dancing bee use as compass to accurately point in the right direction? The bee reference is the direction of the sun. This can be demonstrated easily by covering the sky and using a lamp as an artificial sun: the direction of dancing will rotate, always maintaining the same angle with the lamp as the angle with the sun during direct flight towards the food. Period 2　Reading （1） 一、双基提要 To the west and off the European Continent, there are several thousands of island on the continental shelf(大陆架). They are generally called the British Isles( 大不列颠岛). Of all the isles, the largest one is called the Great Britain. The name Great Britain was not applied to this large area island until the 17th century, its southern part adopted the name England in the 5th century when groups of invaders fro Northern Europe, traditionally called the Angles, Saxons and Jutes, were taking possessing of this area. Their language, the English language, spread far and wide and later became the official language of the nation. The “Engl-” part of the word comes from the word Angles while the “-ish” part means “belonging to”. The word English means “the language that belongs to the Angles”. 二、课堂反馈 （一）True or False questions. (　 ) 1 If we could hear old English today, we would be able to understand it without much difficulty.　 (　 ) 2 Old developed from Anglo-Saxon and the language of the Vikings. T (　 ) 3 It was not until the 10th century that Old English became the official language of England. (　 ) 4 Middle English began with the Norman Conquest. (　 ) 5 Adding an s to make plurals is the German way in old English. (　 ) 6 After the Conquest, the Normans once ordered the English to speak French. (　 ) 7 Nowadays people from different areas in Britain have no difficulty understanding each other when communicating. (　 ) 8 Modern began during the Renaissance. (　 ) 9 It’s very clear that English is still changing a lot.　 （二） Read the passage and fill in the form below Time What happened Results Old English 5th to 11th century 1 Three tribes (the _____, the _____ and the ______ ) invaded Britain 2 Around the 9th　century, the ________ invaded Britain. 1 _________ developed. 2 They created Old English. 3 Many pairs of words and phrases have similar meanings. Middle English From ____ to the 16th century The Normans conquered England and _________ ________ of the country. Many words from French came into English. Modern English Began from the 16th century The Renaissance 1. It includes many ______ and _______ words. 2. ________ also changed a lot. 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 阅读下列短文，掌握其大意，然后从1—20各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出一个最佳选项。 There are about fifteen hundred languages in the world. But only a few of them are very 　 1 . English is one of these. Many, many people  2  it, not only in England and the U.S.A, but in other parts of the world. About 20 million speak it  3   their own language. It is difficult to say how many people are learning it as a  4  language. Many millions are  5   to do so. Is it easy or difficult to learn English? Different people may have different  6 . Have you ever  7  such advertisement in the newspapers or magazines? “Learn English in six weeks, or your  8  back….” Of course, it never  9  quite like this. The only language that seems easy to learn is the mother tongue. We should  10  that we all learned our own language well when we were  11 . If we could learn English in the same way, it would not seem so difficult.  12  what a small child does. He listens to what people say. He  13  what he hears. When he is using the language, talking in it,  14  in it all the time, just imagine how much  15  that gets! So it is  16  to say that learning English is easy  17  a good command (掌握) of English depends on a lot of practice. And practice needs great effort and  18  much time. Good teachers, records, tapes, books, and dictionaries will  19 . But they can’t do the student’s  20  for him. 1. A.difficult　　　 B. important　　　C. interesting　　　 D. easy 2. A.learn　　　　B. try　　　　C. understand　　 D. use 3. A.as　　　　　 B. for　　　　C. with　　　　　 D. like 4. A.good　　　　 B. foreign　　C. useful　　　　 D. own 5. A.learning　　 B. enjoying　　　 C. trying　　　　 D. liking 6. A.questions　　　 B. problems　　　 C. ideas　　　　　D. answers 7. A.found　　B. watched　　C. noticed　　D. known 8. A.knowledge　　B. time　　　　　 C. money　　　　　D. English 9. A.happened　　 B. looked　　　　 C. seemed　　 D. felt 10. A.know　　B. remember　　　 C. understand　　 D. think 11. A.students　　　 B. children　　　 C. babies　　　　 D. parents 12. A.Believe　　 B. Mind　　　 　　C. Do　　　　 D. Think 13. A.uses　　B. enjoys　　　　 C. tries　　　　　D. does 14. A.using　　　 B. thinking　　　 C. trying　　　　 D. practicing 15. A. time　　　 B. money　　　　　C. language　　　 D. practice 16. A.hard　　B. easy　　　　　 C. nice　　　　　 D. clever 17. A.because　　 B. for　　　　C. when　　　　　 D. before 18. A.uses　　B. takes　　　　　C. costs　　　　　D. spends 19. A.do　　　　　B. work　　　　　 C. help　　　　　 D. learn 20.A.work　　 B. study　　　　　C. homework　　　 D. listening （二）阅读理解 A 　　　　　　　　  Learning a Second Language 　 Some people learn a second language easily. Other people have trouble learning a new language. How can you help yourself learn a new language, such as English? There are several ways to make learning English a little easier and more interesting. 　 The first step is to feel positive about learning English. If you believe that you can learn, you will learn. Be patient. You do not have to understand everything all at once. It is natural to make mistakes when you learn something new. We can learn from our mistakes. In other words, do not worry about taking risks, 　 The second step is to practice your English. For example, write in a journal, or diary, every day. You will get used to writing in English, and you will feel comfortable expressing your ideas in English. After several weeks, you will see that your writing is improving. In addition, you must speak English every day. You can practice with your classmates outside class. You will all make mistakes, but gradually you will become comfortable communicating in English. 　 The third step is to keep a record of your language learning. You can write this in your journal. After each class, think about what you did. Did you answer a question correctly? Did you understand something the teacher explained? Perhaps the lesson was difficult, but you tried to understand it. Write these accomplishments in your journal. 　 You must be positive about learning English and believe that you can do it. It is important to practice every day and make a record of your achievements. You will enjoy learning English, and you will feel more confidence in yourself. 1.　　To feel positive about learning English means _______. A.　　if you are patient, you will learn B.　　you can understand everything all at once C.　　if you make mistakes, you can learn from your mistakes D.　　if you believe you can learn, you will learn 2.　　_____ follows in addition. A.　　More information　　　　　　　　B. The same information C.　The result　　　　　　　　　　　　 D. The opposite information 3.　　When you learn English, you do not need to ______. A.　　be patient　　　　 　　　　　　 B. make mistakes C.　express your ideas in English　　　　 D. understand everything all at once 4.　　What is not helpful for you to enjoy learning English? A.　　To communicate in English. B.　　To worry about taking risks. C.　　To think about what has been done after each class. D.　　To make a record of the achievements. 5.　　What is the main idea of this passage? A.　　It is very important to learn a second language. B.　　Some people learn a second language easily. Other people do not. C.　　There are ways to help you learn a second language more easily. D.　　Don’t worry about taking risks when learning a second language. B 　 Marx could read all the leading European languages and write in three: German, French and English. He liked to repeat the saying: “A foreign language is a weapon in the struggle of life.” He took up the study of Russian when he was already 50 years old, and in six months he knew it well enough to get pleasure from reading Russian books. 　 In spite of the late hour when Marx went to bed, he was always up between eight and nine in the morning. He had some black coffee, read through his newspapers and then went to his study. He worked there till two or three in the afternoon. He stopped his work only for meals and when the weather allowed, he went out for a walk in the evening. During the day he sometimes slept for an hour or two on the sofa. In his youth he often worked the whole night through. 6.　　The word “leading” in the first paragraph means ________. A.　　most  　　 B. main　　　 C. many  　　 D. less important 7. Marx considered a foreign language was as important as _____. 　A. the joy of life　 　　　　　　　　B. the gun in fighting B.　　the war of the world　　　　　　D. part of struggle 8. It was ______ work that Marx could read Russian books. A. less than half a year’s　 　　　　 B. after six months’ C. six months before　　　 　　　　 D. during the six months 9. When he was young, Marx often _______ . A. stayed up throughout the night　 B. got up rather early C. went to bed between eight and nine in the morning D. stayed up until eight or nine in the morning 10. When the weather ______ , Marx went out for a walk in the evening. A. was warm　　B. was allowed　　　 C. was well 　　　D. was fine （三）短文改错 　It was Sunday. The weather was very good that　　　　　　　　1.______ I wanted to play the basketball. My mother was doing some 　　 2.______ washing, so I asked her to washing my coats. Then　　　　　　　3.______ I went to call Li Ping, but he is reading and 　　　　　　　　　　 4.______ didn’t want to go with I. When I called Xiao　　　　　　　　　5.______ Ming, the different thing happened. I felt 　　　　　　　　　　6.______ very sorry because I only knew playing. I should　　　　　　　 7.______ learn them two. So I returned home quickly 　　　　　　　　　　8.______ and did my homeworks. When my mother 　　　　　　　　　 9.______ saw I had done, she was very happy.　　　　　　　　　　　　 10._____ Period 3　Reading （2） 一、双基提要 1 confuse  They confused me by asking so many questions.  他们提一大堆问题，把我都弄糊涂了。  Don’t confuse Australia with / and Austria.  confused (表示人)糊涂的 All your changes of plan have made me confused.  confusing (表示物) 莫名其妙的 难以理解的The instructions on the box are very confusing. 2 be made up of 　　 Animal bodies are made up of cells. 　consist of　　　　 The committee consists of ten members. 3 mix sth with sth 　　Oil doesn’t mix with water.　  mix A and B together  You’re always mixing me up with my twin sister. 你老是把我和我孪生妹妹弄混了! 4 句型 That’s why / because …　　　　　　 It’s certain that …  … we sometimes find if hard to decide which words or phrases to ues. 二、课堂反馈 （一） 根据所给首字母写出单词 1 You should read more to enrich your v___________. 2 In July, 2004 China opened its citizens’ tourist travel to many E___________ countries, such as France, Italy, Switzerland, Austria, Germany, Denmark and Norway. 3 This large international company has offices t___________ the world. 4 Singapore has four o__________ languages: English, Malay, Chinese and Tamil. 5 Government promises to c__________ more jobs for laid-off workers. 6 We used to listen to the radio a lot, but n__________ we mostly watch television. 7 The United Kingdom c__________ of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. 8 The brave explorer once paid a visit to the t__________ living in the Amazonian jungle. （二）单项选择 1 The instructions were so __________ that I’ve done it all wrong.  A confused 　　 B confusing 　　　C confuse 　　D confusingly 2 If you sing several times, your children will begin to __________ the words.  A pick out 　　　　B pick 　　　　　 C pick up 　　D pick over 3 What does the milk taste if　with orange juice?  A mixed 　　　　B mixing　　　C is mixed  　　　D to mixed 4 Each boy and each girl __________ looking forward to the coming holiday.  A has being looked　　 B have been looked C are looking 　D is looking 5 —You were out when I dropped in at your house. 　 —Oh, I __________ for a friend from England at the airport.  A was waiting　　　B had waited 　　 C am waiting　 　 D have waited 6 It now seems __________ that Pam will lose her license. A sure 　　　　 B certain 　　C certainly 　　　D surely 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 阅读下列短文，掌握其大意，然后从1—20各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出一个最佳选项。 Jim was a young man in his early twenties who was working in a private company. He was a good worker worthy of 　1　, so his boss was pleased with him. As he was such a likable man and easy to 　2　 , he was 　3　 with his workmates, too. They also made 　4   of him but he never got 　5　 with them and would only laugh. Jim could never tell a lie, 　6　 hard he tried. 　7　 , he was so honest and shy that he would go red even when he was telling the 　8　 . He used to stand in front of the mirror and  9　 lying. But as soon as his face going red he had to look 　10　. One morning he didn’t 　11　 going to work because he 　12   to a party the night before and it 　13   until the early hours of the morning. And 　14   the first time in his life he decided to 　15   the day off. He rang his boss,   16   to be a woman. “Hello,” he said 　　 17　, “I’m afraid Jim can’t come to work today. He isn’t feeling very well.” Poor Jim was thankful that his boss couldn’t see him because his hands were   18   and his face was bright red. “Thank you for letting me know,” said the boss. And just as the boss was about to 　19　, he said, “Just a moment, madam, who’s speaking?” “Oh!” Jim replied, making a great 　20   to make a voice like a woman. “This is my landlady speaking!” 1. A. pay　　　　 　　B. trust　　　　　　 　　C. everything　　 　　　 D. much 2. A. deal with　　 B. do with　　　　　 　　C. help with　　　　 　　D. get on 3. A. popular　　　　B. satisfied　　　　  　 C. admired　　　　  D. respected 4. A. tricks　　　　 B. fun　　　　　　  C. use　　　　　　 　D. effect 5. A. cross　　　　　B. along　　　　　  C. work　　　　 　　 D. shame 6. A. how　　　　 　 B. no matter　　　　 　　C. even　　　　　  　D. however 7. A. For example　　B. As a result　　　　　 C. In fact　　　　　 　　D. Once more 8. A. word　　　　　 B. lie　　　　　　　 　　C. truth　　　　　  D. matter 9. A. enjoy　　　　　B. enjoyed　　　　  C. practise　　　　 D. practised 0. A. away　　　　　 B. ahead　　　　　  C. on　　　　　　 　 D. through 11. A. forget　　　　　　B. remember　　　　　C. feel like　　　　 　　D. hate 12. A. had gone　　 B. had been　　　　 C. had attended　 　 D. had joined 13. A. ended　　　　 B. had ended　　　　 　　C. hadn’t ended　　 　　D. was ended 14. A. by far　　　　　　B. so far　　　　　  　　C. ever since　　　 D. for ever 15. A. make　　　　 B. see　　　　　　  C. put　　　　　　 　D. take 16. A. in order　　　 　 B. so as　　　　　　 　　C. pretending　　　 D. sounding 17. A. nervously　　 　　B. bravely　　　　　 　　C. eagerly　　　　  D. curiously 18. A. dirty　　　　 　　B. hurt　　　　　　 C. shaking　　　　 　D. waving 19. A. hang on　　　 　　B. hang down　　　　 C. hang up　　　　 　D. hang off 20. A. effort　　　　　　B. effect　　　　　  　　C. idea　　　　　  　D. plan （二）阅读理解 A Like many people you may be dreaming of a career as a rock and roll star. There are two ways to go about getting one. First there is the traditional way. Find some friends and form a group. Learn to play the guitar or the drums. Write your own songs. Spend hours arguing about the band name. Then go out on the road. The next step is to spend a year or two touring. If you are any good, the crowds will get bigger. In the end an artist from a record company may come to a show. If he or she likes you, there may be a deal (交易).This is the path traditionally followed by bands in the music industry. Success means fame and wealth. And failure gives you some interesting stories to tell your children. Over the last few years a different path to success has become known. Boy bands like Boyzone and girl bands like Spice Girls don’t come together on their own. They are created by managers and record companies. Their image (形象) is strictly controlled. Professional(专业) song writers usually write their music. This is a convenient arrangement and the public seems to love the result. Though boy and girl bands have become very popular recently, there is a long tradition of making music in this way. In the early 1960’s an American businessman called Berry Gordy founded Motown Records. Motown is short for “motor town”. The record company was based in the city of Detroit, where thousands of African-Americans had moved to work in the car industry. They brought with them a cultural tradition of writing and performing music. This style later became known as “soul music”. Berry Gordy was a diamond miner. Motown stars were not just given songs to sing. They were also taught how to dress well and speak properly. 1.The passage is mainly about ________. A. why the record company is forming more bands B. how the band has developed and become popular C. what is the traditional way of forming a band D. when the band became popular 2. If a newborn band wants to succeed, as the writer tells, it must have the chance_______. 　A. to travel in big cities　　　　　　　　  B. to meet a businessman　 　C. to perform before an artist 　　　　 　 D. to experience failure again and again 3. From the fourth paragraph, we can draw a decision that__________. A.　　Motown was only enjoyed by the workers in Detroit B.　　Motown showed the style of the black Americans C.　　Detroit used to be famous for its music industry D.　　Detroit was founded by African-Americans 4. The underlined word “where” in paragraph 4 refers to _______. 　A. the city of Detroit 　 　　　　　　　　　 B. The record company 　C. Motown　　　　　　　　　　　　　  D. the diamond mine 5. According to the passage, which of the following statements is true? A.　　The only successful way to form a band is to write your own songs. B.　　Boyzone is a band which was formed on its own. C.　　A band with a record company shouldn’t perform in a controlled way. D.　　The African-Americans had a cultural tradition of writing and performing music. B Sydney—Mobile phone has become a problem for middle schools. Some middle schools in Australia have banned students from carrying mobile phones during school hours. Mobile phone use among children has become a problem for the school this year. Several children have got mobile phones as Christmas gifts, and more students want them. Mary Bluett, an official, said mobile phone use is a distraction(分心的事) to students during school hours and it also gives teachers so much trouble in their classrooms. Teachers were also saying that sometimes students might use phone messages to cheat during exams. She said some schools had tried to ban mobile phones. Some parents felt unhappy because they couldn’t get in touch with their children. Many teachers said students should not have mobile phones at school, but if there was a good reason, they could leave their phones at school offices. They also said there were many reasons why the students should not have mobile phones at school: they were easy to lose and were a distraction from studies. Many people say that they understand why parents would want their children to have phones, but they think schools should let the students know when they can use their mobile phones. 6. Some middle schools in Australia have banned students from carrying mobile phones　　 . 　 A. because they are students　　　　　　　 B. when they are free 　 C. when they are at school　　　　　　　　 D. because they are young 7. We know from the passage that some children get mobile phones from 　　　　 . 　 A. the makers and sellers　　　　　　　　  B. some other strangers 　 C. their parents and friends　　　　　　　  D. some mobile phone users 8. Some parents felt unhappy because they couldn’t 　　　　  during school hours. 　 A. use their mobile phones　　　　　　　  B. leave their mobile phones 　 C. help the teachers with their work　　　　 D. get in touch with their children 9. The underlined word “they” in the fifth paragraph refers to 　　　　 . 　 A. many teachers　　　　　　　　　　　  B. some messages 　 C. mobile phones　　　　　　　　　　　  D. some students 10. The topic mainly talked about in the text is 　　　　 . 　 A. why the students should not use mobile phones in some Australian schools 　 B. when the students of some Australian schools can use their mobile phones 　 C. whether the Australian students can have mobile phones at school 　 D. how some parents feel when their children should not carry mobile phones Period 4　Reading （3） 一、双基提要 1 contribute  contribute sth to / towards sth The volunteers contribute huge amounts of their own time to the project.  Einstein was awarded the Nobel Prize for his contribution to Quantun Theory. (量子理论)  Day centers for the elderly make a valuable contribution to the overall service.  照顾老人的日托中心为整个服务事业作出了可贵的贡献。 2 despite　prep. 　= in spite of　尽管　不管　 任凭  Despite all our efforts to save the school, the County decided to close it.  She went to Spain despite the fact that the doctor had told her to rest. 3 raise  She raised her eyes when he came in.  The peasants here used to raise pigs, and nowadays many of them have moved to cities.  A number of questions were raised at the meeting.  Raise your hands when you know the answer. 二、课堂反馈 （一）根据所给首字母或汉语写出单词 1 The rise in crime is mainly due to social and economic f___________. 2 Joe ran his ___________(舌头) over his dry lips. 3 I’ll ___________ (更换) the vase I broke as soon as possible. 4 Please read after me and pay attention to the ___________ of the new words. 5 They are trying to persuade the local government to a___________ the new plan. 6 George took c___________ of the business after his father died. 7 Don’ let the desire for money r___________ your life. 8 What he said is not easy to understand for he said with a strong d___________. 9 Our school has u___________ some major changes in the last five years. 10 Coal was former out of dead forests by a long slow p___________ of chemical change. （二）翻译下列句子  1 他对公司的成功作出了重要的贡献。  _________________________________________________________________________ 2 计算机对现代生活产生了重大影响。(impact) _________________________________________________________________________  3 这起事故导致两名乘客死亡。(result)  _________________________________________________________________________ 4 尽管生病，他还是来参加会议。(despite)  _________________________________________________________________________ 5 她是典型的上流社会人物。(upper) _________________________________________________________________________ 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 In the forests or in the fields, you can often see small hills of earth and busy little ants. Ants 　1　 in different places. An ant has two strong jaws to 　2　 soil, to cut up food, to 　3　 the eggs or the young. The head of 　4　 ant is triangular（三角形的），with two different eyes and sometimes three more very small　5　, which are made up of many parts, 　6　 the ant can see 　7　 that moves around it. Some of these eyes see things near it, others can see things 　8　 in the distance. 　　An ant has six legs. Its feelers have twelve joins, 　9　 which the ant finds its 　10　 in its underground home. Some ants do not build nests, but make use 　11　 hollows under stones or logs. Other ants build their little hills with 　12　, bits of wood, sand and earth. The life of ants is not only 　13　 and play. They must have rest too. But they don’t 　14　 long. When waking up, they begin to 　15　 themselves. They use their tongues just 　16　 a cat uses hers. 　　Ants have a good 　17　. When an ant, which has been away for a long time, returns to its nest, the others 　18　 it and show their greatest joy at its return. But if a strange ant 　19　 their nest, the ants will 　20　 stranger killed at once. 1. A. keep　　B. eat　　　　C. live　　　　　 D. grow 2. A. water　　　 B. find　　　　　 C. eat　　　　D. dig 3. A. carry　　　 B. lay　　　　C. turn　　　　　 D. pick 4. A. an　　　　　B. a　　　　　　　C. this　　　　　 D. that 5. A. eye　　　　 B. noses　　　　　C. mouths　　 D. feelers 6. A. yet　　　　 B. or　　　　 C. also　　　　　 D. so 7. A. itself　　　B. everything　　 C. Nothing　　D. something 8. A. far off　　 B. next to 　　　 C. close to 　　　D. clear of 9. A. without　　 B. with　　　　　 C. for　　　　D. in 10. A. food　　　 B. bed　　　　C. way　　　　D. road 11. A. about　　　B. at　　　　　　 C. of　　　　 D. for 12. A. trunks　　 B. roots　　　　　C. branches　　　 D. leaves 13. A. study　　　B. work　　　　　 C. search　　　　 D. walk 14. A. grow　　　 B. wander　　 C. live　　　　　 D. sleep 15. A. look after B. clean　　　　　C. care about　　 D. clear 16. A. like　　　 B. before　　　　 C. while　　　　　D. as 17. A. eyesight　　　B. smell　　　　　C. memory　　 D. strength 18. A. recognize　B. realize　　　　C. know　　　　　 D. see 19. A. breaks　　 B. enters　　　　 C. finds　　　　　D. leaves 20. A. force　　　B. make　　　　　 C. have　　　　　 D. show （二）阅读理解 A 　　“Depend on yourself”is what nature says to every man. Parents can help you. Teachers can help you. Others still can help you. But all these only help you to help yourself. 　　There have been many great men in history. But many of them were very poor in boyhood, and had no uncles, aunts, or friends to help them. Schools were few and low. They could not depend on them for an education. They saw how it was, and set to work with all their strength to know something. They worked their own way up to fame. 　　One of the most famous teachers in England used to tell his pubils, “I cannot make worthy men of you, but I can help you make men of yourselves. ” 　　Some young men have no ambitions（雄心）to do anything ; and they are to be pitied. They can never succeed unless they see their foolishness, and change their courses. They are nothing now, and will be nothing as long as they live, unless they accept the advice of parents and teachers. and depend upon their own honest and serious efforts. 　1. the best title for this passage is ______. 　　A. Depend on yourself　　　　　　　　 B. Don’t depend on your parents 　　C. Help yourself　　　　　　　　　 D. The Good Advice 　2. From the passage we know that many great men in history ______. A. learned everything themselves in boyhood　 B. didn’t receive any education 　　C. had no relatives or friends D. depended on themselves to become famous 　3. Which of the following is TRUE? 　　　A. Parents can make you succeed. 　　B. Great men in history were very poor. 　C. Teachers would like to help you to be a man 　　D. Only you can make yourself a great man 　4. Why have some young men failed in everything? 　　A. They have no ambitions.　　 　　　　　 B. They are to be pitied 　　C. They haven’t changed their courses.　 D. They haven’t seen their foolishness 　5. Everyone can succeed EXCEPT that ______. 　　A. They accept the advice of parents and teachers　 B. They depend on themselves 　　C. They change their courses often　 　　　　　　D. They are honest and work hard B Upset Grandma Criticizes Daughter’s Ways as A Mom Dear Abby, 　This is my first letter to you, although I have been reading your column for many years. I need an outside opinion. 　I am a grandmother in my 70s and have just returned from visiting my daughter, her husband and their three dearly loved children—all under the age of 5—and I’m upset with some of their parenting ways. 　For example: 　They lock the doors to their children’s bedrooms at night because “the children might get out of their beds and wander around the house, and we may not hear them.” 　If one child should get punishment, all three are punished, and if one child says a naughty word, all three are given hot sauce (辣酱汁)　in the mouth. 　I know these parents love their children very much, but are these ways of disciplining them wise? Please understand, it is not my aim to interfere (干涉) . 6. From the passage we can see that Abby is probably ________. 　 A. a famous writer　　　　　　　　　　  B. a columnist(专栏作家) 　 C. a friend of hers　　　　　　　　　　  　D. a government official 7. Gram’s daughter ______________. 　 A. is very strict with her children　　　　 　B. does not love her three children C. always punishes her children at night　 　 D. often gives her children hot sauce 8. The passage doesn’t say so, but from the lines (字里行间) you’ll find that 　　　　. 　 A. Gram likes writing letters　 　　　　　 B. Gram likes watching children 　 C. Gram likes reading newspapers　 　　D. Gram likes visiting her daughter 9. Gram writes the letter in order to __________.. 　 A. disclose (揭发) her daughter’s ways as mother 　 B. criticize( 批评) her daughter’s ways as a mother 　 C. express her anger about her daughter’s ways as a mom 　 D. get others’ opinion about her daughter’s ways as a mom 10. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage? 　 A. Gram seems to care for her grand- children very much. 　 B. Gram is against some of her daughter’s ways as a mom. C. Abby is for only one of Gram’s daughter’s ways as a mom. D. Abby agrees with Gram about her daughter’s ways as a mom. （三）短文改错 　　Last week my parents and I took a two-day trip to Emei　　　 Mountain in Sichuan. As everyone knows, it’s famous　　　　　 1　　　　 mountain with all kinds of plants and animals. The weather　　 2　　　　 was fine. It was about noon we arrived at the foot of　　　　　3　　 　  the mountain. The three of them were very excited. As we　　　 4　　　　 climbed the mountain, we fed monkeys, visiting temples　　　　 5　　　　 and told stories. On the way up I was busy taking picture　　　6　　　　 since the scenery was so beautiful. The time passes quickly. 　7　　　　 Evening came down. We spent the night in a hotel at the top　　8　　　　 of the mountain. The food was expensive and the service was　　9　　　　 good. I was so tired that I fell asleep at the moment my　　　 10　　　 head touched the pillow（枕头）. Period 5 Word power 一、双基提要 1 arrange 整理　排列　安置 安排  The books are arranged on the shelves in alphabetical order. We must arrange for dinner. I’ve arranged for a doctor to see him.  We still have to arrange where to meet. 2 in addition  In addition to giving a general introduction to computers, the course also provides practical experience. 3 have a word with sb 与某人谈话  have words 吵架 4 permanent members of the UN Security Council 联合国安理会常任国 二、课堂反馈 Fill in the form below about some countries in the world. Country Capital Language Location China Beijing Chinese Asia France French Europe the USA English America New Delhi Hindi, English Asia Rome Italian Europe Mexico Mexico City America Japan Japanese Asia Madrid Spanish Europe Singapore Singapore City Asia Wellington English, Maori Oceania Stockholm Swedish Europe Australia Canberra English Cairo Arabic Africa Russia Russian Europe Argentina Buenos Aires America Germany Berlin Europe Portugal Lisbon Portuguese Norway Oslo Norwegian Greece Athens Asia Chile Santiago America 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 　 About a year ago, I went to stay at Detroit Hotel. I didn’t want to carry 1  money with me, so I asked the desk clerk to put　2  bill in the safe for me. 　 The next morning,  3 , the clerk said he knew nothing about money. I didn’t have 4  proof that I had given the man the money. There was nothing I could do but  5  to the nearest lawyer. 　 The lawyer advised me to return to the hotel with him and give  6  hundred-dollar bill to the clerk. So I　 7 . An hour later, I went back to the desk and asked for my money.  8  I had the lawyer as an eye-witness, the clerk could not say he knew　 9  about it. Another hour later, I put the second part of the  10  plan into action. This time both the lawyer and I went to the hotel. I  11  the hundred-dollar bill once again and the clerk insisted he 12  it to me. I denied. The lawyer said to him, “I saw this gentleman give you a hundred dollars. If you don’t  13  it over immediately, I’ll be  14  to call the police.” The clerk  15  he had been tricked, so he gave me back　16  hundred-dollar bill. 　 “I don’t know how to thank  17  for getting my money back.” I  18  the lawyer. And 　19　 he answered? 　 He said,” Oh , don’t thank me. 20  a hundred dollars, please.” 1. A. too much 　 　　　 B. much too　 　　　　　 C. much more　　　D. very much 2. A. a hundred dollars　　　　　　　　　　　　　 B. a hundred-dollar　 C. one hundred dollars 　　　　　　　　　　 D. one hundred-dollars 3. A. and　　　　　　　　B. therefore　　　　　　 C. then　　　　　 D. however 4. A. other　 　　　　　 B. any other　　　　　　 C. any 　　　 D. a lot of 5. A to go 　　　　　　　B. go　　　　　　　　C. went　　　　　 D. could go 6. A. one　　　　　　　　B. a　 　　　　　　　　　C. the 　　　 D. another 7. A. listened　　　　　　　 B. did 　　　　　　　C. heard　 　　　 D. gave 8. A. Since　 　　　　　 B. For 　　　　　　　C. So 　　　 D. But 9. A. everything　　　　 B. something　　　　　　 C. anything　 　　D. nothing 10. A. lawyer 　　　　　 B. lawyer’s　　　　　　 C. clerk 　　　　 D. clerk’s 11. A. bowed for　　　　 B. begged for 　　　　　 C. asked for　　　D. longed for 12.A. should have given　　　B. had already given 　　C. should give　　　　D. would give 13. A. hand　 　　　　　 B. throw　 　　　　　　　C. give　　　　　 D. return 14. A. wanted 　　　　　 B. taken　 　　　　　　　C. forced　　　　 D. had 15. A. recognized 　　　 B. realized　 　　　　　 C. guessed 　　D. failed 16. A. the first　　　　　　 B. the second 　　　　　 C. the very　 　　D. just the 17. A. your help　　　　 B. you kindness　 　　　 C. you well　 　　D. you enough 18. A. talked with　 　　　 B. said to 　　　　　　　C. spoke with 　　D. told to 19. A. what do you know　　　　　　　　　　　 B. what do you suppose　 　　 C. do you believe what　 　　　　　　　　　　 D. do you think what 20. A. That will be 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　B. There will be　　　　 C. That will have 　　　　　　　　　　　　 D. There will have. （二） 阅读理解 A Around the world more and more people are taking part in dangerous sports and activities. Of course, there have always been people who have locked for adventure—those who have climbed the highest mountains, traveled into unknown parts of the world or sailed in small boats across the greatest oceans. Now, however, there are people who try to find an immediate thrill from a risky or dangerous activity which may only last a few minutes or even seconds. I would consider bungee-jumping to be a good example of such an activity. You jump from a high place(perhaps a bridge or a hot-air balloon)200 meters above the ground with an elastic(有弹性的)rope tied to your ankles(脚脖子). You fall at up to 150 kilometers an hour until the rope stops you from hitting the ground. Other activities which most people would say are as risky as bungee-jumping include jumping from tall buildings and diving into the sea from the top of high cliffs(峭壁). Why do people take part in such activities as these? Some psychologists suggest that it is because life in modern society has become safe and boring. Life, according to many people, offers little excitement. They only live and work safely and comfortably. The answer for some of these people is to try to find danger in activities such as bungee-jumping. 1. What’s the thrilling and risky activity which may only last a very short moment? A. Mountain-climbing. 　　　　B. Bungee-jumping. C. Region-exploring.　　　　　　 D. Boat-sailing. 2. Which of the following shows the movement in bungee-jumping? 3. People take part in dangerous sports mainly because_________. A. they want to have a change in sports B. there is not much work for them to do C. there is not much excitement in their lives D. they are worried about such sports　  B Leonardo da Vinci began painting the Mona Lisa in 1503. He was working on a special painting for a church at the time, but the church painting was not going well. An Italian businessman asked Leonardo da Vinci to paint a picture of the businessman’s second wife. This is the woman who can be seen in the Mona Lisa. In a word, the Mona Lisa is a very good example of Leonardo da Vinci’s work. Leonardo da Vinci uses darkness and light in a clever way in the painting. Leonardo da Vinci loved science and maths. Right away a person can see that there is a lot of geometry(几何学)in the Mona Lisa. The face of the Mona Lisa is made of many circles and round shapes like balls. Even her smile can be seen as a small part of a large circle. The woman in the painting is sitting on a balcony(阳台), and mountains can be seen behind her. Leonardo da Vinci loved to study rocks and mountains, so these can be seen over and over in his other paintings. The woman is sitting with her knees to the side. Her head is turned to look out of the painting. Her hands are held together in front of her. This way of sitting is now used by many artists when they are painting a picture of a man or woman today. 4. Who painted the Mona Lisa? A. A businessman.　　　　　　　　B. Leonardo da Vinci. C.　 His second wife.　　　　　　　 D. The businessman’s wife. 5. The woman in the painting is_______. A. an Italian businesswoman　　　　　B. Leonardo da Vinci’s wife C. the wife of a businessman　　　　 D. a woman from the church 6. Where is the woman in the painting? A. On a balcony.　　　　　　　　　　 B. On a knee. C. On a mountain.　　　　　　　　D. On a rock. 7. What can a person see in the painting? A. A lot of geometry.　　　　　　　　B. Clever use of light and darkness. C. Mountains.　　　　　　　　　　D. All of the above. (D) Flags have existed for over 3000 years. The earliest flags were wooden or metal poles(杆) topped with a carving(雕刻品). About 2000 years ago pieces of fabric (织物) were added to some poles for decoration (装饰). Over the next 500 years the free-flying part of the flag became more important. Every country today has its own flag. Many groups and organizations also have a flag that stands for, or symbolizes, the aims of the group. The Flag of the United Nations depicts (描绘)a world map, centered on the north pole. The map is surrounded by an olive(橄榄)wreath(花环)symbolizing peace and co-operation. The flag is blue and white.   8. Flags have been existed for _________. A. 500 years　　　　　　　　  　 B. over 3000 years 8C. about 2000 years　　　　　  D. between 500 and 2000 years 9. A very old flag is likely to _________. A. be made of fabric　　　　 　　B. have a map on it C. have white shapes on it　　 　　　D. be made of carved wood 10. An olive wreath is used to represent _________. A. peace　　　　 B. purity　　　　　  C. justice　　　　　　　D. equality Period 6 Grammar (1) 一、双基提要 It的用法 1人称用法 人称用法是指it可以用来代替一个名词、一个短语、一个从句或一个句子，以避免它们在句中的重复。这时它可以指提到过的，也可以指未提到过的，在句中作主语或宾语。 （1）指非生物、动植物和不明性别的婴儿。That is a new magazine. I bought it this morning. （2）指成员众多的集体 The acrobats performed for a large audience last night. It was very excited by the show. （3）指某一动作或事情　 I like dancing,but she doesn't like it. 2指示用法 指示用法是指it用在句型“It is/was+表语”中，指明某人或某物的身份。这时它可以代替this或that，作用同this或that，指提到过的或未提到过的。 What's that? It's a computer. 3先行用法 （1）指代不定式。How long does it take to travel from Beijing to Shanghai. （2）指代动词-ing形式。以 It's no use, It's no good等开头的句子常以-ing分词作真正主语。 It's no good crying over spilt milk.　　It's no use trying to persuade him. （3）指代名词性从句。　It is pity that you didn't see such a good film. 4无人称用法 （1）用于表示自然现象、时间、距离、环境等。　Is it cold in this room? No, it isn't. （2）用于以连系动词seem, appear, look, happen等作谓语，后接一个that从句的句中。 It seems that he is always correct.　　 It appears that she is an experienced teacher. 5强调用法　强调it本身无词义。它用来强调句中放在表语位置的某个句子成分（谓语动词除外），其强调句型为：“It+is/was+被强调成 分（通常为主语、宾语、状语）+从句（由 that/who 引导）”。 二、课堂反馈 单项选择 1. Tom‘s mother kept telling him that he should work harder, but ___________ didn’t help. A. he 　　　　　　 B. which 　　　　　　C. she 　　　　　　　D. it 2. Is ___________ necessary to tell his father everything? A. it 　　　　　　 B. that 　　　　　　　　 C. what 　　　　　　 D. he 3. I don’t think ___________ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work. A. this 　　　　　 B. that 　　　　　　　　 C. its 　　　　　　　D. it 4. Was it in this palace ___________ the last emperor died? A. that 　　　　B. in which 　　　　　　 C. in where 　　　　 D. which 5. It was Shanghai ___________ the Communist Party of China was founded. A. where 　　　　　B. that 　　　　　　　　 C. at which 　　　　 D. that where 三、巩固练习 （一）单项选择 1 It took us over an hour ___________ along the street.　 A. walk　　　　　 B. to walk　　 　　　C. walking 　　　　　D. walked 2 I think it a great honour ___________ to visit your country.　 A. to invite　　　　　B. inviting 　　　　 C. having invited　　 　 D. to be invited 3 Many people now make ___________ a rule to buy cards for their friends before Christmas.　 A. themselves　　 B .it　　　　 　　　 C. that　　　　　　　D. this 4 ___________ is very clear to everyone that he is round and tall like a tree.　 A. This　　　　　 B. What　　 　　　　 C. That　　　 　　 　D. It 5 In the United States, bus travel doesn’t cost much as train travel, ___________ ?　 A. don’t they　　　　B. does it 　　　　　C. do they 　　　　　D. doesn’t it 6 Someone is at the door, who is ___________?　 A. this　　　　　 B. that　 　　　　C. it　　　　　　　　D. he 7 ___________ raining hard for three hours without stopping.　 A. It is　　 　　 B. It was　 　　　　 C. It has been　　　 D. It had been 8 —Has the boy got his bicycle now?　　　—Yes, the police gave ___________.　 A. him to him　　 B. it to it　　　　　C. it to him　　　 　D. him to it 9 Has ___________ been decided when we are to hold the sports-meeting?　 A. that　　　　　 B. this 　　　　　　 C. it　　　　　　　　D. what 10. —Did Li Lei call me while I was out?　  —Yes, it was ___________ that called you.　 A. him　　 　　　 B. he　　　　　　　　C. who　 　　　　 D. whom 11 Nothing is wrong with the radio, ___________?　 A. isn’t it　　 　　　B. is that　　　　　 C. is it　　　　　　 D. isn’t that 12 I don’t think ___________ difficult for a Chinese student to master a foreign language within five years. A. that　　　　　　B. it　　 　　　 C. too　　　　　　　 D. very 13 It’s the second time you ___________ late this week.　 A. arrive　　 　　 B. arrived 　　　　　C. have arrived　　　D. had arrived 14 It will not be ___________ we meet again.　 A. long before　 　B. before long　　　　　 C. soon after　  　　D. shortly after 15 It’s demanded that we ___________ there on foot.　 A. not to go　 　　B. don’t go 　　　　C. not go　 　　　　 D. won’t go 16 It was not until 1936 ___________ basketball became a regular part of the Olympic Games.　 A. that　　　 　　 B. when　　 　　　　 C. which　　　　　　 D. then 17 ___________ you met the Englishman?　 A. Where it was that　 B. Who it was that  C. Where was it that　　 D. Where was that 18 ___________ that she has gone to the United States?　 A. Was it true　　B. Is it true　　　　C. It is true 　　　　　 D. It was true （二）阅读理解 A When I opened my E – mail the other day, a pretty woman named Rachel appeared on my computer screen. She greeted me by name and started talking with great enthusiasm (热情). Every now and then she stopped to smile at me or blow a kiss. She was reading to me an E – mail from my brother, and a lot of it was about his getting the phone company to give him a high speed Internet connection. It was pretty cool. Rachel was there thanks to a new technology called Facemail. Facemail lets you send E-mail that gets read to the receiver by an attractive male of female form of by a clown (小丑). The software, which is free, can be downloaded at www. facemail. com. Facemail faces are lifelike, and they simulate (模仿) emotions based on emotions – for example – that you put in your text. Type in :-X ,and Rachel blows a kiss. Life FX, the company that develops the Face – mail, is sure there are broad business uses. The reason E – business is not popular, the company says, is that buying over the Internet lacks the human touch. But what if you went to the Nike website and Michael Jordan greeted you by name, waited on you and personally closed the sale? And it is talking with Whirlpool about using the technology in a computer screen on a fridge. Then if Mom can’t be home when kids get back from school, she can leave a note with voice and image telling them what there is to eat. Facemail could get hot fast. Personally, I’m a fan. But Facemail should be used with care. The clown looks lively and funny at first. But if you select the clown, put a few rude words in an E – mail and add some angry emotions, you’ve got Psychomail（心理邮件）. 1. The pretty woman that appears on the writer’s computer screen was _________.　 　A. a woman working on the Internet　 B. his brother’s girlfriend C. not a real person 　　　　　　　　D. the picture of his penfriend 2. The main advantage of Facemail is that_________.　 A. you can hire a beautiful woman to read the E – mail to you B. you can see the person who sends you the E mail C. you can see the person who sends you the E – mail as you like D. E – mail can be read in a more lovely way 3. We can infer from the passage that Facemail _________.　 A. is likely to be used in other aspectsof our daily life B. can destroy your E – mail if not properly used C. can be downloaded free of charge　  　　 D. will take the place of the E – mail system. 4. The writer mentioned Nike website and Michael Jordan to show that　　　 . A. Famous people like Michael Jordan also like to use facemail B. facemail can make shopping on the Internet more interesting C. Nike website will increase its sales by Jordan D. Michael Jordan will serve you himself on Nike websit 5. What is the writer’s attitude towards Facemail?　 A. He thinks it needs further improvement.　　 B. He thinks it cool and funny. C. He thinks it a danger to the Internet. D. He thinks people should be careful with Facemail. B Net library is a library that lends out digital(数字化) books. It treats a digital book like a paperback copy. It charges libraries per book per copy and gives publishers a cut of the total income. 　 From the consumer’s point of view, this means that if more than, say, five people want the latest Danielle Steel romance novel, other people who request that book will get a message saying the title is unavailable. 　 It’s a model many publishers seem to have embraced. More than 350 gave the company rights to hand out their digital works, and McGraw-Hill Corporation and Houghton Mifflin Corporation have put money in the company. The California public libraries and about 1,800 others across the US are trying out the Net Library service. 　 Some librarians criticize the New Library model. Stanford University librarian Michael Keller argues that the company is creating an unnatural fear of digital works, which is contrary to the ideas of the Internet. Keller and some other librarians argue for the e-book vision set forth by EBrary. EBrary is starting a service that lets us users read books for free. But it will charge about 25 cents a page when a person tries to print out material or copy and paste it into a different file or tries to download a copy onto an computer. Christopher Warnock, chief executive of EBrary, believes most consumers won’t want to buy entire books, only the parts that interest them. “There’s not really a lot of good in owning an electronic file and having to store it and manage it. It doesn’t make sense,” he said. 6. How do publishers get money from the Net Library? A. They get money from selling their books to the Net Library. B. They share the money with the Net Library. C. They get money by cutting the cost of the books. D. They get the money from the readers. 7. The underlined word “embraced” in the 3rd paragraph means _____. A. taken something willingly　　　　　　B. held something tightly C. disliked something badly　 　　　　　D. tried out something hard 8. From the 2nd paragraph we can see consumers ______. A. don’t care if they are charged money 　 B. enjoy the service of the Net Library C. don’t like other people borrowing books D. complain about the limited number of the new books 9. What does the last paragraph mean? A. Net Library is not a good way for the consumers. B. There is no need for consumers to have a whole book. C. Ebrary is not a good library for the consumers. D. It’s reasonable to charge the consumers money for copying some pages. Period 7 Grammar (2) 一、双基提要 名词性从句考点及热点问题 名词性从句包括主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句。因为它是从句，因此具有句子的特点，有主、谓成份；同时又具有名词性特点，所以可以在句子中作主语、宾语、表语或同位语。 1、引导词what与that的用法区别。 引导主、宾、表语从句时，what要充当主语、宾语或表语等句子成分，that不作任何成分，只在语法上起连接的作用。例如（NMET’96）： ____ we can’t get seems better than ____ we have. A. What; what　　　　B. what; that 　　C. That; that　　 D. That; what  　 (答案A ) 　　That the former Iraq president Saddam was captured has been proved. 2、引导词whether和if的用法区别。 通常，引导主语从句、表语从句和引导同位语从句时，要用连词whether，不用if；习惯上也只能说whether or not，而不说if …or not。例如（MET92）： ____ the 2000 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing is not known yet. A. Whenever　　　　　B. If　　 C. Whether　　 　 D. That　　 　　　(答案为C) 3、名词性从句的语序。 与别的从句一样，名词性从句必须用自然语序，即使在疑问句中，从句也不倒装（而在主句上倒装）。例如（MET91）: No one can be sure ____ in a million years. A. what man will look like　　　 　B. what will man look like　 C. man will look like what　　　 　D. what look will man like　 　　　(答案为A) 4、Who / whoever, what / whatever等的用法区别。 一般说来，what/who等含特指意义，而whatever/whoever等含泛指意义，意为“无论什么/无论谁”。例如（NMET97）： It is generally considered unwise to give a child ____ he or she wants. A. however　　　　　 B. whatever　 C. whichever　　　D. whenever　　　 (答案为B) 5、Where, when, why等连接副词引导的名词性从句。 Where, when, why等连接副词也可以引导名词性从句，使用的关键是：这个词必须符合句子的逻辑要求。例如（NMET’99）： — I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week. — Is that ____ you had a few days off? A. why　　 　　　　　B. when　 C. that　　 　　　D. where　 　　　 (答案为A） 6、同位语从句引导词where, when的用法特点。 说明先行词内容的同位语从句的引导词where, when与被说明的名词在概念上不一致。但引导定语从句的引导词却必须保持一致。是比较： Then arose the question ____ we were to get so much money.　　　 　　　(答案为A） This the house ____ the great man Mao Zedong was born 110 years ago. A. where　　B. that　　C. about which　　D. in which　　　 　　(答案为A/D） 二、课堂反馈 单项选择 1. Can you make sure ________ the gold ring? A. where Alice had put 　　　　　　　 B. where had Alice put C. where Alice has put 　　　　　 　　D. where has Alice put 　2. You can’t imagine __________ when they received these nice Christmas gifts. 　　A. how they were excited　　 　　　　 B. how excited they were 　　C. how excited were they　　 　　　　 D. they were how excited 　3. Word has came __________ some American guests will come for a visit. 　　A. what　　　　　　　B. that　　　　　 C. whether　　D. when 　4. We all agree with him on __________ he said. 　　A. what　　　　　　　B. that　　　　　 C. why　　　　D. how 　5. The reason I plan to go is __________ if I don’t. 　　A. what she will have a disappointment　　　 B. that she will be disappointed 　　C. because she will be disappointed 　　　D. on account of she will be disappointed 　6. ______ she will come to Beijing is not known yet. 　　A. Whenever　　　　　B. If　　　　　　 C. Whether 　　D. That 　7. Could you tell me ________ it snows in winter in Australia? 　　A. if　　　　 　　　 B. whether　　　　C. that　　　 　　D. either A or B 　8. What the doctors really doubt is _______ my mother will recover from the serious disease soon. 　　A. when　　　　　　　B. how　　　　C. whether 　　D. if 　9. These pictures are so special that I would do _______ I can to save them. 　　A. whatever　　　　　B. that　　　　　 C. which　　　　　D. whichever  10. ______ knows the truth will tell you about it. 　　A. Who that　　　　　B. Whoever　　 　 C. Whom that　　　D. That who  11. I will give this dictionary to ________ wants to have it. 　　A. whomever　　　　　B. whoever　　　　C. whatever　 　　D. wherever  12. I don’t know _________ he will go to the museum. 　　A. when　 　　　 　　B. where　　　　　C. if or not　　　D. what  13. Go and get your coat. It’s _________ you left it. 　　A. there　　　　 　　B. where　　　　　C. there where　　　　D. where there  14. No one can be sure _______ in a million years. 　　A. what man will look like　　 　　　　　 B. what will man look like C. man will look like what　　 　　　 D. what look will man like 15. _______ Tom liked to eat was different from _______. A. That; hat you had expected 　　　　　　　　　　 B. What; that you had expected C. That; what you had expected 　　　　　　　　　 D. What; what you had expected 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 　　We often see dogs always put out their tongues out in summer. But _1_ the dogs didn't do so. Long, long ago, the dog was very bad. He _2_ did a good deed. 　　One summer day the dog 3_ into a forest. _4_ he saw the forest was beautiful and clean, a _5_ idea came to him. Then he brought _6_ dirty things to the forest and put _7 everywhere. What he did was _8_ by a monkey who hid _9_ a big tree. He didn't tell anyone _10_ the dog did because _11_ did not know why the dog did so. Several days _12_ , it got hotter and hotter, and the dirty things became rotten (腐烂). The air smelt _13_. Many animals fell ill. All the other animals became angry and tried _14_who had done it and punished him. The monkey knew _15_ bad the dog was. So he _36__ the other animals the truth. They caught up with the dog and 17 him eat all the dirty things and _18_ the forest clean. 　　After that the dog  19_ honest. To remember this, he put his tongue out in _20_. 1. A. at last　 　　 B. at least　　 　　 C. in the past　 D. first of all 2. A. never　　 　B. often　　　 　　　C. for ever　　 　D. suddenly 3. A. entered　 　B. arrived　　　　　 C. reached　　 　 D. went 4. A. So　　　 　 B. When　　　 　　　 C. So that　　 　 D. Once 5. A. good　　 　 B. bad　　　　 　　　C. wonderful　 　 D. common 6. A. a lot　　 　B. a great many　　　C. much　　　 D. a little 7. A. it　　　 　 B. that　　　  　　　C. these　　　 　 D. them 8. A. looked　　　B. caught　　　　　　C. watched　　　　D. seen 9. A. behind　　　B. before　　　　　　C. around　　 　　D. besides 10. A. how　　　　B. when　　　 　　　 C. what　　　 D. why 11. A. he　　　 　B. him　　　　　　　 C. whom　　　 D. which 12. A. before　　 B. ago　　　　　　　 C. later　　　 　 D. long 13. A. terrible　 　 B. nice　　　　　　　C. badly　　　　　D. clean 14. A. not to tell 　B. to find out　 　　C. not telling　 D. finding out 15. A. very　　 　B. what　　　 　　　 C. why　　　　　　D. how 16. A. said　　　 B. spoke　　　 　　　C. told　　　  　 D. answered 17. A. wanted　　 B. let　　　　  　　 C. allowed　　 　 D. asked 18. A. keep　　　 B. let　　　　  　　 C. have　　　 　　D. make 19. A. wasn't　　 　 B. didn't seem to be 　　C. became　 　　　D. went 20. A. spring　　 　 B. summer　　　　 　 C. autumn　 　　　D. winter （二）阅读理解 A George and Carol were medical students at the same college and，like many other college students，they enjoyed playing jokes on people．Both of them smoked，but they knew that their professor was strongly against it，because smoking was dangerous to one's health．One day they decided to play a joke on their professor． At one of their medical lectures there was always a skeleton（骨架模型）in the room so that the professor could show the students the different bones in the human body． That afternoon，Carol and George put a cigarette in the mouth of the skeleton that was to be used for their next lecture． When the professor came in，he began talking and then noticed the cigarette．He went up to the skeleton，took the cigarette out of its mouth and said，“You really should give them up，old boy．Look what they're doing to you！” 1．What do the professor's words mean？ A．It's only a joke to put a cigarette into a skeleton's mouth． 　　B．He would persuade the skeleton to give up smoking． 　　C．Smoking is really dangerous．It may even cause death． 　　D．Students should not learn from the skeleton to smoke． 2.To whom did the professor really say these words？ 　　A．To George and Carol only． 　　 B．To the skeleton which he called “old boy”． 　　C．Only to himself． 　　　　　　　　 D．To all the students who attended his lecture． 3．The underlined word “they” in the passage means ＿． 　　A．George and Carol　　　　 B．the students 　C．the bones　　　　 D．cigarettes 4．What do you think of the professor？ A．Serious but humorous．　　　　　 B．Honest and foolish． C．Kind and polite．　　　　　　 D．Hard to get along with． B 　　The Japanese pay much attention to the luck of telephone numbers. The bathhouses, for example, like to use 4626, because when read in Japanese, it has the same pronunciation as "have a good bath." Both the clothes shops and the butcher's like 4129 better than any other number because this number can either be read as "good dress" or "good meat". 　　Since these numbers are connected with something nice, people can remember them very easily. So they have become advertisements for the shops. 　　On the other hand, there are also telephone numbers which are regarded as forbidden by the Japanese people. 1564, for example, has the sound of "kill people" while the number 4219 has the sound of "people die." 　　At present, there are about 44 million telephones in Japan, yet it is almost impossible for everyone to get a lucky telephone number. So these numbers have become commodities (商品) and can be sold as goods. The price can reach as expensive as 222 thousand Japanese yen. 5. The number 4626 sounds in Japanese like _________. 　A. "good dress"　　 　 B. "have a good bath"　　　 C. "kill people" D. "people die" 6. The clothes shops like _________.  A. 4626　　　 B. 4129　　C. 1564　 D. 8888 7. It is possible for ________ to get a lucky telephone number. A. many 　　　　 B. everyone　　　　　　　C. only a few　　 D. quite a few 8. Some telephone numbers can be sold as goods because they ________. 　A. are interesting　 　B. can bring good luck　C. are easy to get　D. are difficult to get Period 8 Grammar (3) 一、双基提要 1 increase 增加  The population of this town has increased.  They have increased the price of petrol by almost 20%.  increasing difficulty越来越多的困难  decrease 反义词 　　an increase in crime 　　on the increase正在增加 2 standard 标准；水准；规范；规格  The teacher sets high standards for his pupils. 这位老师给自己的学生定下高标准。  Your recent work has been below standard / hasn’t up to standard.  你最近的工作没有达到规格。 3 ban After the accident he was banned from driving.  The new government has banned strikes and demonstrations.  新的政府禁止罢工和示威活动。 二、课堂反馈 （一）根据所给首字母或汉语写出单词 1 Bird flu s_________ to the villages nearby, so they had to kill the chickens. 2 Bill and I often d_________ but we are good friends. 3 She’s the head of the firm’s personal d_________. 4 More and more people are crowding into the city, so the population in the city is i_________. 5 Is this sweater made of p_________ wool? 6 Our government is working hard to improve people’s living s_________. 7 The athlete was b_________ from joining in all the contests. 8 “Walking along the street” and “a packet of cigarettes” are p_________. （二）单项选择 1 I agree _________ you _________ his latest work. It’s awful!(糟糕) 　A on; about 　　　 B to; with 　　　 C with; to 　　　　　D with; about 2 The boy is very generous. He doesn’t care much _________ money. 　A for 　　　　　　 B about 　　　　　C with 　　　　　　　D in 3 Is this the reason ­_________ she gave for her being late? 　A that 　　　　　　B why 　　　　C for with 　　　　　D because 4 Oil prices have risen by 32 percent since the start of the year, _________ a record US$57,65 a barrel on April 4. A. have reached　 B. reaching　 　　C. to reach　 　　　　　 D. to be reaching 5 The country life he was used to ____ greatly since 1992. A. change　 　　　 B. has changed　 C. changing　 　　　 D. have changed 6 Months ago we sailed ten thousand miles across this open sea, which _______ the Pacific, and we met no storms. A. was called 　　 B. is called　　　C. had been called 　　　D. has been called 三、巩固练习 （一）完型填空 I became lame(瘸的) in both legs in my childhood. I can’t stand 　1　 the support of two sticks. Only in my wheelchair can I 　2　 . I still remember the first day at  3　 . When I appeared at the door,　　4　  in the classroom stared at me in  5　 . My face turned　 6  . I couldn’t help　　7　 back. It was the 　8　 and sympathy(同情) in their eyes that  9   me doing so. I went shyly towards an unoccupied (空的) seat. Being lame, I didn’t dare(敢)　to 　10　 in front of my classmates. I was afraid that I might be 　11　 at. In those days I was very sad to see others walking 　12　. One day, a few students came up to me and asked me to go outside. I was really　 13  . They encouraged me with a(n) 　14　 smile and　 15   me in my wheelchair from place to place. I was 　16　 to them for giving me a chance to see the 　17  of our lovely school with my own eyes. After that we often read, played and talked together. My friends are always 　18　 to help me. It made me 　19　 I am handicapped(残疾的). Once they asked me, “What is the most beautiful thing in our school?” Without hesitation(犹豫) I said, “It is the 　20  ” 　 1. A. with　　 　　　 B. without　　　　C. under　　　　　D. on 　 2. A. walk　 　　 B. run　　　　 　 C. sit　　　　 　 D. stand 　 3. A. school　 　　　 B. wheelchair 　　C. home　　　 D. hospital 　 4. A. he　　　　　B. she　　　　 　 C. everyone　　　 D. nobody 　 5. A. thought　　　　 B. interest　　　 C. anger　　　　　D. surprise 　 6. A. red　　　　　　 B. brown　　　　　C. white　　　 　 D. black 　 7. A. entering　　　　B. hiding　　　　 C. coming　　 　　D. turning 　 8. A. feeling　 　　　B. kindness　　　 C. sorrow　　　　 D. pain 　 9. A. made　　　　B. prevented　　　C. kept　　　　　 D. let 　 0. A. walk　　 　 B. study　　　　　C. practice　　 　D. speak 　 11. A. laughed　 B. smiled　　　 　C. stared　　　　 D. looked 　 12. A. quickly　 B. slowly　　　  C. happily　　　　D. shyly 　 13. A. brave　　 B. sad　　　　  　C. hurt　　　　 　D. excited 　 14. A. honest　　 B. friendly　　　 C. luckily　　　　D. handsome 　 15. A. pushed　 　B. placed　　　  C. drew　　　　　 D. pulled 　 16. A. satisfied　　　B. sorry　　　  　C. loyal　　　　　D. grateful 　 17. A. signs　　 B. sights　　　　 C. building　　　 D. students 　 18. A. ready　　　B. smart　　　　　C. wise　　　　 　D. unwilling 　 19. A. forget　　 B. remember　　　 C. imagine　　　 D. think 　 20. A. teacher　 B. schoolyard　　 C. classmates　　 　 D. friendship （二）阅读理解 B 　　It looks like a mobile phone, but the service is much cheaper. It acts like a mobile phone, but only in your own city. Beyond the city walls, it’s useless. 　　“Little Smart”, also called “xiaolingtong”, has always been compared to mobile phones. But actually, it is more like one of those cordless phones(无绳电话) used around the home. The only difference is that this one reaches much further than from the bathroom to the living room. It can travel across an entire city. 　　 Cheap costs are the main reason for the success of Little Smart. It　costs 25　yuan a month for the line and about 0.1 yuan per minute to use. A mobile phone, on the other　hand, can cost four or five times as much. What’s more, unlike mobile phones, there’s no fee for incoming calls. So these low charges have attracted many users. But, Little Smart is not really that smart. Users often complain about its bad voice quality. And there are not as many stations to pick up its signals as there are for mobiles. “I couldn’t receive a phone call if I was on a bus,” said Li Ping, a user in Hangzhou. “It worked fine when I stood still, but there were breaks in signal when I was moving.” 　　Scientists are trying to make Little Smart more user-friendly. Messaging and Internet access  have been added to the service. And the latest Little Smart handset even has color screen. 1. Why is Little Smart popular in China? 　A. It looks like a mobile phone.　　　　B. The service is much cheaper. 　C. There is no fee for incoming calls.　　　D. All of the above. 2. How is the charge of Little Smart? 　A. About 10 fen per minute to use.　 B. It costs four or five times more than a mobile phone. 　C. It only costs 25 yuan each month. D. There’s no fee for calls. 3. Why are users not satisfied with Little Smart? 　A. They can’t hear each other clearly out of the city. 　B. There are so few stations for Little Smart to pick up its signals. 　C. When you use it, you must stand up. 　D. The charges are low. 4. The underlined word “handset” in the last paragraph means “______”. 　A. the hand bag　 B. telephone　　 　　C. service　　D. mobile phone 5. What can we infer from the passage? 　A. It’s wrong to say that Little Smart is smart. 　B. Scientist are trying to make Little Smart smaller. 　C. Little Smart will be better than today. D. People will change Little Smart into a mobile phone. C 　　When he took office, George W. Bush, son of former president George Herbert Walker Bush, became the first son to follow his father into the White House since John Quiney Adams followed John Adams in the early 19th century. 　　Bush was born on July 6, 1946, in New Haven, Connecticut, the first child of George Herbert Walker Bush and Barbara Pierce Bush. Although  George Herbert Walker Bush began his career in the oil industry, he finally served as a congressman(国会议员), and vice(副) president and president of the United States. 　　At the age of two,Bush moved with his parents from Connecticut to Odessa, Texas, where his father took up the oil business. After a year in Texas, the family moved to California for business reasons. A year later, the family returned to Texas and settled in Midland, where Bush lived from 1950 to 1959. 　　In 1959, again for business reasons, the family moved　to Houston, Texas. In 1961 Bush left Texas and went to Andover, Massachusetts, to attend Phillips Academy, a　boarding school(寄宿学校) that his father had also attended. 　　At Phillips, Bush played basketball, baseball, and football. He was best known for being head cheerleader. In 1964 he enrolled at Yale University in Connecticut and his father and grandfather had also attended Yale. At Yale, Bush was considered an average student, but he was popular with his classmates. 　　Bush graduated from Yale with a bachelor’s degree in history in 1968. Then he joined the Air National Guard and remained in the Guard until 1973. After earning his MBA from Harvard in 1975, Bush returned to Midland. Like his father, he first entered the oil industry as a “landsman(新手)”. However, Bush’s oil companies never enjoyed great success. He took more interest in politics. He helped his father to become president and in 1994 he himself was elected governor（州长）of Texas. 　　In the summer of 1999, Bush began to run for the president of the USA and on January 20, 2001, George W. Bush, hand raised, took the oath (宣誓) of office to become the 43rd president of the US. 6. What does the writer intend to tell us in the first paragraph? A. George W. Bush is the first son in American history to follow his father into the White House. 　B. George W. Bush is the first son of former president George Herbert Walker Bush. 　C. John Quincy Adams and his father were both former American presidents. 　D. George W. Bush is the second one in American history to follow his father into the White House. 7. We may learn from the text that George W. Bush ______. 　A. got on very well at the universities 　B. was very good at basketball, baseball and football 　C. did everything as his father had done　　 　D. was a very successful politician like his father 8. Which of the following is NOT true about George W. Bush? 　A. Young Bush lived with his family in Texas from 1948 to 1961. 　B. He once studied at a university that his father and grandfather had also attended. 　C. He once ruled over（统治） an American state before he entered the White House. D. He once served at the Air National Guard for about five years. Period 9 Task (1) 一、双基提要 Body Language By Joseph DeVeto When we speak, we use much more than just words. We also communicate with our face, our hands, and even our own body. This kind of communication can be called “body language” or “non-verbal communication”. Non-verbal communication not only includes how we move our body, but also hand gestures, facial expressions including eye contact, and how we use our voice. Psychologists estimate that between 60% and 80% of all of our communication with other people is non-verbal. We communicate a wide range of information non-verbally. We also show our feelings, attitudes, moods, hopes, and wishes far better with non-verbal language than with words. Not only is a large QUANTITY of communication non-verbal in nature, but the QUALITY is high as well. For example, if a person says something positive while his face looks negative, which are we more likely to believe? In most cases, we will believe the non-verbal facial expression. In the end, his words will not succeed in communicating his message. If we want to succeed in our everyday conversations, we really must learn to “speak” with our body well! Let me begin by giving you some general advice. The main thing is to relax and be natural. Trying too hard to use “body language” will make you seem a bit strange. Instead, you should allow your body language to naturally follow your words. If you say something positive, then your face, body and hands should show it too. If you are expressing a sad or worried feeling, then your face, body and hands should change with that feeling. As you think about it more and consider how you can use your body to communicate, you will become more and more natural. More specifically, let’s talk about hand gestures. Using our hands, we can emphasize our main points, remind our listener how many main points we have, and let our listener know when we are changing topics. A dramatic movement of the hand or moving our hands wide apart can signal how important something is. We can even use two fingers, either close together or far apart, to show how big something is. To show VERY strong feeling we could clap our hands together loudly or make a fist（put our fingers in a ball as though we want to hit someone）and hit a table or desk. To show that we welcome someone, on the other hand, we can hold our hands out with the palms up, and maybe move them towards a chair to invite someone to sit next to us. Of course, we can also use our fingers to count, but be careful. People in some countries do not count the same way as in China. In France, for example, people do not count “one” by holding up their first finger, called the “index finger”. Instead, they hold up their thumb. In Japan, some people put their thumb DOWN（with the four fingers up）to mean“one”! This can create confusion sometimes, so be sure not to use only non-verbal communication. Use words too, so that your listener will be sure to understand you. 三、巩固练习 （一）完型填空 Americans are careful about how and when they meet one another’s eyes．In their　 36 conversation, each eye contact  37　 only about a second before one or both persons look away．When two Americans look searchingly into each other’s 38 , emotions are heightened and the relationship becomes more intimate(亲密的)． 39 , they carefully avoid this, except in proper occasions． 　 Proper street behaviors in the United States require a nice  40  of attention and inattention．You are 　41　 to look at a passer-by just enough to show that you’re aware of his presence．If you look too 　42　, you appear too proud; if you look too much, you are too curious．Usually　43　 happens is that people watch each other until they are about eight  44　apart, at which point both cast down their eyes．In England the polite listener stares at the 　45　attentively and blinks(眨眼) his eyes occasionally as a sign of　46　 That eye-blink says　47　 to Americans, who expect the listener to nod or to　 48　 something—such as “mm---hum”． 　　Americans living abroad  49  find local behaviors hard to understand．Such complaints can often be  50　．“People there were  51　．They stared right at me on the street, they looked me  52　．I kept wondering whether I was　53 or not．” They don’t 　54　 that people in some places think nothing of staring at 55　on the street． 36．A．private　　　　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　B．normal　　　　 C．public  D．secret 37．A．remains　　　　B．lasts　　　　  　　　　　 C．continues　　 　D．stays 38．A．eyes　　　　　 B．ears　　　　 　　　　　　 C．legs　　　　 D．mouths 39．A．But　　　　　 　　　　　　　B．However　　 C．Therefore　　　 D．So 40．A．balance　　　　　　　　　　 B．record　　 　C．chance　　　 　 D．memory 41．A．allowed　　　　　　　　　　 B．permitted　　 C．required　　　 　 D．supposed 42．A．little　　　　  　　　　　　B．much　　　　 C．few　　　　  　 D．many 43．A．which　　　　　　　　　　　 B．that　　　　  C．what　　　　 　D．who 44．A．centimeters　　 B．kilometers　　　　　　　 C．inches　　　　　D．feet 45．A．speaker　　　　　　　　　　 B．worker　　　　 C．lecturer　　　 　 D．listener 46．A．interest　　　　　　　　　　B．love　　　　  C．hate　　　　  D．curiosity 47．A．anything　　　 　　　　　　 B．something　　　C．nothing　　　 D．no 48．A．cry　　　　　 　　　　　　　B．interrupt　　 C．whisper　　　　D．shout 49．A．seldom　　　　　　　　　　　B．hardly　　　 　C．hard　　　　 　D．sometimes 50．A．heard　　　　 　　　　　　　B．said　　　　 　C．read　　　　 　D．written 51．A．exciting　　 　　　　　　　 B．surprising　　 　 C．disturbing　　 　 D．encouraging 52．A．left to right　　　　　　　 B．back and forth　　C．more or less　　　D．up and down 53．A．uncombed　　 　　　　　　　 B．undressed　　　　 C．untouched　　　D．unnoticed 54．A．see　　　　　 　　　　　　　B．know　　　 　C．tell　　　　  　D．hear 55．A．another　　　 　　　　　　　B．other　　　　　C．the others　　 D．others （二）阅读理解 A A four-year-old girl is lying in the arms of a doc­tor．She has just lost her mother．Her pink clothes are full of blood and her eyes look at something only she can see． Every day we see pictures like this on our televi­sions．We see Iraqi (伊拉克的) children begging for food and water from American and British soldiers as they move through towns and cities towards the cap­ital, Baghdad．We see these children follow­ing parents, carrying bags of almost the same size as their small bodies as they escape from their homes in Baghdad． They show just some of the young lives that have been turned upside down by ongoing war and the terri­ble price paid by Iraqi children． “Dad, why are the Americans fighting against us? Are we going to be killed?” asks the son of Abu Singar, an Iraqi engineer．Abu finds it hard to explain this war to his eight-year-old son． He tries to make him feel safe by saying, “The bombs (炸弹) are far away from us．The Americans are fighting the soldiers．We’re going to be all right．” Even though Abu knows it isn’t always true, little else can be done．In Baghdad, parents give their children sleeping pills to try and let them escape from the sound of bombs．And all the schools are closed． Now things are worse, and the ongoing war makes it impossible to count the number who are hungry, sick, hurt or even dead． 1．What happens to the children in Iraq because of the war? 　A．The children will get better than before． 　B．The children beg for food and water from Ameri­can and British soldiers． 　C．The children in Iraq go away from their homes in Baghdad． 　D．The children live a most terrible life． 2．What does the word “ongoing” mean in Chinese? 　A．正在进行的 B．非正义的　　　 C．未授权的　　　　 D．影响恶劣的 3．The father doesn’t tell the true thing to his child because_____． 　A．he wants to make his child not feel dangerous 　B．he and his child are afraid to lose each other in the war　 　C．he doesn’t want his child to believe American soldiers 　D．he will lose his country and his home 4．What would be the best title for the report? 　　　　　　　　　A．Iraqi Children during the War 　　　　　　　　　B．Sickness, Death in Iraq 　　　　　　　　　C．America and England Fight against Iraq 　　　　　　　　　D．A Girl in the War in Iraq B Twin singers Take a careful look．The two girls look very much like twins—there are hardly any differences (区别)．But they’re not! They come from different parts of the world and got to know each other in 2000…　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  (2003-05-22) Climbing to the top It is wonderful and exciting．It is Qomolangma，the highest moun­tain in the world．For years, tens of thousands of people have tried to climb the dangerous mountain．．．(2003-05-06) Home of Olympic dreams When the 29th Olympic Games are held in Beijing in 2008, sports players from all over the world will get together and it will be a place where many dreams will come true．．．．　　　　 (2003-04-09)   Water for the future It is the source (来源) of all life and we need it every day．But the world’s pop­ulation is growing fast, and we are short of．．．　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 (2003-03-22) 5．If you want to read about sports, which dates will you choose? 　A．2003-05-22 and 2003-05-06 　B．2003-05-06 and 2003-04-09 　C．2003-04-09 and 2003-03-22 　D．2003-03-22 and 2003-05-22 6．From this text, we know that ____． 　A．the singers are really twin sisters 　B．climbing Qomolangma has become easy 　C．water is important to all life 　D．all the dreams will come true in 2008 7．People in the world are now short of ________． 　A．pop music　　　　　　　　　　B．exciting sports 　  　C．Olympic dreams 　　　　　　　D．fresh water 8．Where can you find this page? 　A．In a storybook．　　　　　　　　　　　　　　B．In a picture book． 　C．On the Internet．　 　　　　 D．In a science book． （三）短文改错 One day, I was cooking in the kitchen as the　　　　 1．________ telephone rings．I went to answer it immediately．　　 　　　　2．________ She was my close friend, Lisa．When we were talking　　　 　3．________ on a phone, the fire alarm sounded．I ran back to the　　　　　4．________ kitchen．The room full of smoke and beef was badly　　　　　5．________ burnt．I quickly turned off the gas, opening all the　　　　  6．________ windows, and then went out of the house．In my　　　　　 　 7．________ surprise, two fire engines were outside my house．I　　　　 　 8．________ was rather worried．I told about the firemen that it　 　　　　9．________ was my careless cooking which caused the heavy smoke．　 　 10．_______ Period 10 Task (2) 一、双基提要 Gestures To wave goodbye or hello to someone, raise your hand and wave it from side to side, not front to back. Wave the whole hand, not just the fingers. Waving the hand front to back or the fingers up and down means “no”, “stop”, or “go away”. Holding your hand up with the palm facing forward but no movement means "stop". Holding your hand with the palm toward your body and wagging the fingers toward the body means “come here”. Holding your hand with the palm up with all fingers curled and repeated curling and uncurling the index finger means “come here”. If you want to point at an object, extend the index finger and use it to point at the object. It is not polite to point at people. 　　If you want the waiter to bring the check, make a writing gesture with one hand as the pen and the other hand as the paper. If you just want the waiter to come, make eye contact and raise your hand. Shaking your head from side to side means no. Shaking your head up and down means yes. Never show your fist with the middle finger extended. This is an insult. Shaking a closed fist at someone is also rude, especially if it is in their face, and is an expression of anger. Although showing your fist with the thumb up or your open hand with the tips of the thumb and index fingers together forming an "O" means "ok", this is an overused stereotype. Americans understand this gesture, but it is mainly used by actors in movies, not in real life. 　　It is not polite to pick your nose or chew your fingernails in public. Likewise, it is not polite to pick your teeth (with or without a toothpick) in public. 　　Patting a woman on her rear end is not appropriate, and will likely get your face slapped. 　　Winking at a woman is also inappropriate because of the flirtatious nature of the gesture. In other circumstances a wink will signal amusement or that the speaker is kidding. Because of the potential for misinterpretation, winking should be avoided. When smiling, it is normal to bare your teeth, so long as the facial expression still looks like a smile, not a grimace. 　　　　　　　　　　 　　　　　　　  　　　　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　  三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 A Shelter for the Homeless Last summer I was a volunteer (志愿者) at a shelter for the homeless, a place for homeless people to sleep at night. I wasn’t working that summer and was   1　  only two classes in summer school, so I had some   2　  time. Three nights a week, I   3　  in the kitchen of the shelter along with four other volunteers. We planned and   4　  for 45 people hot meals   5　  vegetables, chicken, fish and fruit. The homeless people   6　 this good food because many of them usually didn’t eat well. I   71　  this volunteer work, making   8　  with the four volunteers in the kitchen. One was a very nice elderly housewife, one a movie actor, another a young teacher, and the other a college student,　  9　  me. I talked to a lot of the homeless people at the shelter. Their life stories   10　  me with sympathy (同情). Some of them had   11　  with alcohol (酒) or drugs while others only had bad   12　  . One woman worked for almost 30 years for a small company, and   13　  she lost her job. She looked for a   14　  job, but couldn’t find one, for she was too   15　 . She could do nothing but sell her furniture — sofas, chairs, and tables   16　  she could pay for her food. The woman   17　  on job hunting, but she   18　  couldn’t find one. She had no money for her   19　  and had to sleep in her car. Then she had to sell her car. Alone,　  20　 , and homeless, she finally came to the shelter. 1. A. studying　　B. planning　 　　C. holding 　　D. taking 2. A. full 　　　 B. free　　　　C. extra　 　　　 D. long 3. A. helped　　　B. waited　　　C. appeared　 　　D. washed 4. A. ordered 　　B. bought　　　C. cooked　　　D. finished 5. A. with 　　　 B. from　　　　C. by　　　　 D. in 6. A. demanded　　B. needed　　　C. collected　　　D. requested 7. A. wanted　　　B. had 　　C. owned　 　　　 D. enjoyed 8. A. decisions　 　　B. wishes　　　C. friends 　　　 D. changes 9. A. as　 　　　 B. like　　　　C. except　　　　 D. besides 10. A. struck 　　B. filled　　　C. seized　　　　 D. provided 11. A. habits 　　B. worries C. difficulties　 　　D. problems 12. A. luck　 　　B. pain　　　　C. experience 　　D. loss 13. A. so　　　　 B. again　 　　C. then　　　　　 D. thus 14. A. good　 　　B. fresh　 　　C. skilled 　　　 D. new 15. A. old 　　　 B. poor　　　　C. sick　　　　　 D. dull 16. A. if　　　　 B. because C. so that 　　　 D. in case 17. A. went　 　　B. moved　 　　C. came　　　　　 D. worked 18. A. also　 　　B. still　 　　C. almost　　　　 D. even 19. A. block　　　B. cottage C. building　 　　D. flat 20. A. afraid 　　B. shy 　　C. shocked 　　D. mad （二）阅读理解 A 　 Want to save money when traveling by train? Here are some ways. Day returns This ticket can save you up to 45% on the standard fare (车费). You have to travel after the rush hour period Mon.-----Fri, but can travel at any times on Sat. or Sun. Big City Savers 　 These are special low—priced tickets on certain trains. You have to book in advance-- - at the latest by 16:00 the day before you travel. It’s first come, first served. Weekend Returns 　 Weekend Returns are available for most journeys over 60 miles. Go on Fri. Sat. or Sun., and return the same weekend on Sat. or Sun., and save up to 35% on the standard fare. Monthly Returns 　 These are available for most journeys over 65 miles. Go any day and return within a month. Monthly returns save you up to 25% on the standard fare. Family Railcard 　　For $20 this railcard allows you to take a second adult and up to 4 children for only $3 each when you buy single or return tickets. You can travel as often as you like until the card becomes out of date. 1. which is the best ticket to buy if you live in London and went to go to a small town 80 miles away for four days? 　 A. Big City Savers 　 B. Monthly Returns　 C. Weekend Returns 　D. Day Returns 2. A man bought himself a ticket of $15 and three tickets for his family with a family railcard; How much did he pay? 　 A. $ 44　　　　　 B. $29　　　　　　　 C. $24　　　  　　　 D. $15 B 　 Ternang, Mon. more than 10,000 people were made homeless in Ternang after six days of continuous heavy rain. The wooden bridge across the river has been swept away. The town is cut by flood eaters. At the fifth mile Jalan Tengku, the water is now two meteres deep. It is closed to all traffic. Motorists going south are advised to use Jalan Hisamuddin. 　 Flooding first appeared at mid—afternoon yesterday along the river banks. People moving to higher ground were just in time to escape from the flood. Most of the people had to leave their possessions behind. Helped by the army, police, Red Cross Society, the whole town was moved out of danger. They are now housed near the town of Tulang. “ Everything possible is being done to help the unfortunate people,” a government official said, “ In fact, money, food and clothing have begun to come in from organizations and people.” 　 According to the latest reports it is still raining heavily at Ternang. The whole town is expected to be totally covered. So far nobody has been reported dead. 3. Jalan Tengku was closed because ________. 　 A. it had broken up　　 　　 B. the bridge over it had been washed away 　 C. it was deeply flooded　　 D. it was damaged 4. Motorists to the south were advised to__________. 　 A. return home　　　　 　B. avoid all roads 　 C. move the higher ground 　 D. travel by Jalan Hisamuddin 5. The flood victims first escaped to_________. 　 A. the nearby town　　　 B. Jalan Hisamuddin　　　C. higher ground D. Tulang 6. The people are staying ________. 　 A. at a newspaper office　　 B. at a police station 　C. in Tulang D. on their roof tops C 　 Some British and American people like to invite friends for a meal at home. You should not be upset if your English friends don’t invite you home. It doesn’t mean they don’t like you! 　 Dinner party usually start between 7 and 8 p.m. and about 11. Ask your hosts what time you should arrive. It’s polite to bring flowers, chocolates or a bottle of wine as a gift. 　 Usually the evening starts with drinks and snacks. Do you want to be extra polite? Say how much you like the room, or the pictures on the wall. But remember it’s not polite to ask how much things cost. 　 In many families, the husband sits at the end of the table and the wife sits at the other end. They eat with their guests. 　 You’ll probably start the meal with soup or something small, then you’ll have meat of fish with vegetables, and then dessert, followed by coffee. It’s possible to finish everything on your plate and to take more if you want it. Did you enjoy the evening? Call your hosts the next day, or write them a short “thank you ” letter. British and American people like to say “thank you, thank you, thank you” all the time. 7. An Englishman doesn’t invite you to his or her dinner, which_________. 　 A. means he or she doesn’t like you　　　　 B. means he or she likes you 　 C. doesn’t mean he or she likes you　　　　 D. doesn’t mean he or she doesn’t like you 8. You are going to attend a dinner party, and__________. 　 A. you’d better bring a certain present with you　　B. you must leave home for it at 7 p.m. 　 C. you should ask your host when you should leave D. you must arrive at it before 8 a. m. 9. It’s impolite__________. 　 A. to say that you like the host’s room very much 　 B. for a guest to ask the host the price of the things in the room　　 　 C. for a guest to have drinks and snacks before the evening 　 D. for the host and the hostess to sit and eat with their guests 10. In which order will you eat or drink the following things at the meal? 　 A. Snacks, vegetables, meat, coffee　　　 B. Coffee, drinks, soup, fish, vegetables, dessert 　 C. Soup, meat with vegetables, dessert and coffee　 　 D. Drinks, soup, something small, fish and vegetables. Period 11 Project (1) 一、双基提要 1 differ (v.)　difference (n.)　different (adj.)　  differ from sth in sth  Their house differs from mine in having no garage.  The two sides still differ with each other over the question of pay.  双方在报酬问题上仍各执己见。 2 combine (with) （使）联合；（使）结合；（使）合并  The two countries combined against their common enemy.  这两个国家联合起来对抗共同的敌人。  Let’s combine my scientific research and your business skills and start a company.  They combined their holiday with a visit to their relatives.  他们既度假又走访亲戚。 3 complex  (1) difficult to understand, explain or deal with复杂的，费解的  a complex problem (2) 结构复杂的 a complex network of roads connecting Glassgow and Edinburgh 连接格拉斯哥与爱丁堡的错综复杂的公路网 (3) 复合的 a complex sentence 复合句 二、课堂反馈 根据所给首字母或汉语写出单词 1 She_________（代表）her fellow workers at the union meeting. 2 How many new Chinese c_________ have you learned in this passage? 3 We should learn to _________ (结合) our business with pleasure. 4 In the old _________（传说）of ancient Troy (特洛伊), the Greeks got into the city by hiding in a wooden horse. 5 Humans d_________ from other mammals（哺乳动物）in their ability to speak. 6 Try to _________ (简明) your explanation for the children. 7 This rule does not only apply to seniors, but to the school as a w_________. 8 _______ (起初), we had planned a tour of Shangdong but we never got further than Mount Tai. 9 He worker so hard that _________ (终于) he made himself ill 10 UFO means unidentified flying o_________. 11 There is a _________ (复杂) network of roads round the city. 12 In 2001 she retired from politics and took up _________ (写作) as a career. 13 Mount Qomolangma is the world’s highest p_________. 14 There have been great computer _________　(发展) during the last decade. 15 In less than ten years it d_________ from a seed into a full-grown tree. 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 As my train was delayed for two hours, I had plenty of time to spare. After buying some magazines to read on the journey, I gave my wife a long-distance call, then I  1   my way to the luggage office to collect my heavy suitcase. I had  2  it there three days before. There were only a few people  3　, and I took out my wallet to find the receipt(收条) for my case. The receipt seemed not where I had  4  it. No matter how hard I searched, the receipt was nowhere to be found. When my  5   came. I explained the situation sorrowfully  6　 the assistant. The man looked at me up and down as if to say that he had  7   this kind of story many times and asked me to tell him  8  my case was like. I told him it was an old brown-looking object no different　 9  the many cases I could see in his office. The assistant then told me to  10   a list of what was 　11　 in the case. If they were 　12　, he said, I could 　13  the case away. I tried to remember all the things I had hurriedly 　14　 into the case and  15  them down as they came to me. After I had done this, I went to  16  round the office. There were hundreds of  17  there. For one  18   moment, it came to my mind that if someone had picked the receipt he could have easily taken the case already. This had not happened fortunately, for I found the case 　19 in the corner. After  20  the things inside, the assistant was satisfied that it was mine, and told me I could take the case away. 1. A. traveled　　　 B. gave　　　　　 　　C. had　　　　　 D. made 2. A. held　　　　B. left　　　　　 　　C. found　　　　 　　D. forgotten 3. A. standing　　　 B. crowding　　　 　　C. waiting　　　 　　D. talking 4. A. placed　　　B. found　　　　　　　C. held　　　　　　　D. left 5. A. turn　　　　B. chance　　　　 　　C. way　　　　　 D. cause 6. A. to　　　　　B. for　　　　　　C. at　　　　　　　　D. on 7. A. heard　 　　B. knew　　　　　　　C. realized　　　　　D. seen 8. A. how　　 　　B. what　　　　　　　C. that　　　　　　　D. all 9. A. from　　B. with　　　　　　　C. to　　　　　　　　D. among 10. A. take　 　　B. make　　　　　　　C. hold　　　　　　　D. put 11. A. wholly 　　B. all　　　　　　C. already　　　　D. mainly 12. A. everything B. wrong　　　　　　　C. correct　　　　　　　D. all 13. A. take　 　　B. hold　　　　　　　C. bring 　　　　 　　D. put 14. A. place　　　B. put　　　　　　C. held　　　　　　　D. kept 15. A. took　 　　B. gave　　　　　　　C. wrote　　　　　　 D. had 16. A. go　　　　 B. walk　　　　　　　C. run　　　　　　D. look 17. A. people 　　B. workers　　　　C. cases　　　　　　 D. assistants 18. A. fearful　　　　B. interesting　　　 　　C. sad　　　　　　D. happy 19. A, putting　　　 B. setting　　　　　　C. placing　　　　　 D. lying 20. A. seeing 　　B. examining　　　　　C. counting　　　　　D. telling （二）阅读理解 A 　　 Advancing technology may have brought many advantages to human beings, yet at the same time it has created another problem — pollution. As factories continuously pour smoke into the sky, chimneys let off smoke, motor-engines send out fumes and chemical processes pollute the atmosphere with bad smells, we are endangering our sense of smell. Although the government protests that pollution of this kind can become less serious by “clean air” campaigns, the pollution problem still exists. 　　 Sound pollution caused by the thundering noise of jest which scream overhead and the heavy traffic which grinds along the roads making a continuous attack on our ears can make us deaf or harm our hearing. 　　 Polluted water changes the balance of nature and kills life living in it. When strolling by a country stream or on a beach, we notice that the streams are no longer alive and sparkling, for their bad smelling waters are made dirty with petrol, cans, broken bottles and rotten vegetables. Fish are few because few can survive in these waters and we no longer have the chance of watching fish swimming in the water as they catch their food, a victim of progress and pollution. 1. Air pollution is caused by ______. 　 A. factories　 　 B. motor- engines　 C. chemical processes　　D. All of the above 2. Sound pollution can make us deaf, because ______. 　 A. we all take jets on our journey 　 B. there are too many cars, buses and trucks along the roads 　 C. it makes a lasting attack on our ears 　 D. our hearing is a little harmed 3. A country stream may be polluted because ______. 　 A. the balance of nature has been changed 　 B. the water is no longer alive and sparkling 　 C. it is made dirty by petrol, cars, broken bottles and rotten vegetables 　 D. fish can't swim in the water 4. “we are endangering our sense of smell” means ______. 　 A. our sense of smell is being lost　 　　 B. something is wrong with our noses 　 C. we can't smell with our noses any more D. smell is dangerous to some of us 5. Which of the following statements is not true? 　 A. The air pollution problem still exists although the "clean air" campaigns are carried out. 　 B. Advanced technology has brought us both advantages and pollution. 　 C. Fish swimming in the polluted water can kill the plants and animals living there. 　 D. When we are strolling by a country Stream or on a beach, we can smell something bad from the water. B 　　When Americans consider families, many of them think of a 'traditional family.' A traditional family is one in which both parents are living together with their children. The father goes out and works and the mother stays home and rears the children. The biggest change in families in the United States is that most families today do not fit this image. 　　The most common type of family now is one in which both parents work outside the home. In 1950, only 20 percent of all American families had both parents working outside the home. Today, it is 60 percent. Even women with young children are going back to work. About 51 percent of women with children younger than one year old now work outside the home. 　　Another big change is the increase in the number of families that are headed by only one person, usually the mother. Between 1970 and 1988, the number of single-parent families more than doubled. Some families look even less like the typical traditional family. They may consist of a couple of one race who have adopted children of another race, or from another country. In many states, single people may also adopt children. 　　Another change is that families in the United States are getting smaller. In the mid1700s, there were six people in the average household. Today the average household contains between two and three people. 　　One recent change is that the number of marriages is rising. The number of babies born also has been climbing steadily for the past 10 years. Many experts see these trends as a sign that Americans are returning to the values of marriage and family. 6. From the passage, we can conclude that the biggest change in American families is that _____. 　 A. people' s concept of ' traditional family' changes 　 B. women are more financially independent than they used to be 　 C. the size of a family becomes smaller and smaller 　 D. more and more parents do not live together with their children. 7. Which of the following statements is true according to the passage? 　 A. Most of the American families now have members of different nationalities. 　 B. Most American women will work soon after they give birth to children. 　 C. It is possible in the US that unmarried people may also have children. 　 D. It is quite common that children are brought up by the father in an American family. 8. The underlined word 'household' means ______. 　 A. family　 　　　B. a place to live　　　 C. home　　　 D. all family members 9. It can be inferred from the last part of the passage that ______. 　 A. now the American birth rate is rising 　 B. American families are getting bigger 　 C. Americans will return to their traditional family 　 D. now Americans appreciate their traditional family 10. Which of the following would be the best title for the passage? 　 A. The American Family Pattern 　　　　B. The Typical Traditional Family 　 C. The Changing American Family 　　　 D. The American Concept of Family Period 12 Project (2) 一、双基提要 1 reflect  White clothes are cooler because they reflect the heat.  白色衣服因反射热穿起来比较凉快。  Does this letter reflect how you feel?  这封信是否反映了你的真实感觉？ 2 symbol  The dove is the symbol of peace.  Space exploration provides a symbol of national pride.  宇宙探索是引发民族自豪感的代表事物。 3 opposite  The people sitting opposite us looked very familiar.  I thought the medicine would make him sleep, but it had the opposite effect. 4 direction  The thief was last seen heading in the direction of the cinema.  As shot rang out, the crowd ran screaming in all directions.  枪声响起的时候，人群尖叫着四散奔跑。  The girls giggled and pointed in the opposite direction.  姑娘们咯咯地笑了，指向相反的方向。 二、课堂反馈 （一）根据所给首字母或汉语写出单词 1 The _________ (囚犯) are allowed an hour’s exercise every day. 2 Both hydrogen and oxygen are e_________, but water, which is formed when they combine, is not. 3 In the picture the tree is a _________(象征) of life. 4 — Which d_________ does the house face?　—South. 5 Some representatives didn’t go to the meeting for _________ (许多)reasons. 6 He _________ (表示) his willingness with a nod of his head. （一）翻译句子 1 汉字本身就具有意义，可以独立成词。 ___________________________________________________________________________ 2 第一批真正意义上的汉字就是象形文字。 ___________________________________________________________________________ 3 坐你对面的那个女孩是谁啊？ ___________________________________________________________________________ 4 简化汉字已在中国大陆广泛使用。 ___________________________________________________________________________ 5 中国人发明了无数的汉字来表达思想、物体或动作。 ___________________________________________________________________________ 三、巩固练习 （一）完形填空 I went to Beijing this National holiday, and it was an interesting experience of my life. 　　My friends told us that taking the “hard  1 ”to Beijing would be really terrible. So we didn’t know what to  2　. But we were pleasantly surprised when we finally boarded the  3 , which was relatively modern and　4　. During the 12 - hour ride we ate peanuts and talked. It was not  5  at all. It was morning when we arrived. We stepped out of the railway station, having sat in hard seats and not getting much  6 . However, We had energy. First we tried to get return tickets to Changzhou, but the tickets seller 7 us that tickets would not be on 8　for another two days. We were a little worried about getting  9 , but we made up our minds to　10 for the hotel to put our bags down. After fighting our way  11　 the “ypsy” taxi drivers that tried to 　12  us one hundred yuan for the ride, we found a taxi and it  13　 cost us thirty yuan to get 　14  we had planned to go. When we reached the hotel, there was a window for airplane and train tickets.　 15 the man behind the counter could get tickets that day, which we 　16　. The most important lesson about China I ever  17 , is to get someone to do your work for you, and it seems to work out much  18.　We were not able to get tickets, but the　19　 agents could. 　　While in Beijing we saw a lot of places of interest, most of which were very  20 . It was fun to be with thousands of people in one place. There aren’t any words to describe it. 　　1．A. chair B. bed C. seat D. bench 　　2．A. provide B. expect C. happen D. think 　　3．A. plane B. bus C. ship D. train 　　4．A. quick B. clean C. simple D. long 　　5．A. bad B. good C. easy D. hard 　　6．A. trouble B. food C. sleep D. help 　　7．A. promised B. informed C. advised D. persuaded 　　8．A. time B. show C. duty D. sale 　　9．A. behind B. out C. through D. back 　　10．A. start B. ask C. look D. pay 　　11．A. towards B. into C. across D. past 　　12．A. offer B. charge C. bargain D. share 　　13．A. even B. still C. also D. only 　　14．A. what B. which C. where D. how 　　15．A. Somehow B. However C. Therefore D. Otherwise 　　16．A. wouldn't B. couldn't C. shouldn't D. needn't 　　17．A. learned B. taught C. offered D. heard 　　18．A. harder B. earlier C. later D. easier 　　19．A. business B. transport C. travel D. hotel 　　20．A. interesting B. crowded C. famous D. noisy （二）阅读理解 A Parts of Africa are covered by a dark cloud. But this is no rain cloud. It is a living cloud made of billions of locusts that are travelling across the continent eating everything in their path. And now in the battle to stop this disaster, a radio station in Senegal, West Africa, is offering listeners 50 kilograms of rice if they can catch and kill 50 kilograms of locusts. “We think this idea will get more people involved in the war on the locusts,” said Abdoulaye Ba, from Sud-Fm, a radio station in one of Senegal’s worst affected regions. This is West Africa’s biggest locust disaster in 15 years, and it is moving east, causing huge damage to crops. As they move they breed and increase their number and will soon threaten Sudan in the northeast of Africa. Some say it could reach Asia. Experts say the harmful effect on crops in areas already suffering from food shortage and war could cause many people to go hungry. Governments in the region are not well equipped to fight the pest. Although leaders of 12 countries have agreed on a plan, it may be inadequate. “We are now treating 6,000 hectares per day with pesticide　(杀虫剂), but we need to treat 20,000 hectares per day in order to have any hope of controlling this disaster,” said Mohamed Abdallahi Ould Babah, director of locust control in Mauritania. Requests are being made for international aid, which is the only way to limit the crisis (危机), the UN’s Food and Agriculture Organization warned. 1. By using “dark cloud” to describe locusts in the first paragraph, the writer ____. 　　　 A. showed vividly the size and speed of the mass of locusts 　 B. suggested the great damage that locusts can cause 　 C. warned that locusts would sweep the continent like rain clouds 　 D. both A and B 2. The story is about _____. 　　　 A. West Africa’s united effort in fighting a disaster 　 B. the difficulty in controlling locusts 　 C. how locusts caused great damage to West Africa 　 D. a struggle to fight against a disaster posed by locusts in West Africa 3. The locust disaster _____. 　　　 A. would be even more serious in Asia　　 B. is (was) out of control 　 C. affected only the warring regions 　 D. can not be stopped unless twice as much pesticide is provided for the affected areas 4. The word “inadequate” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to _____. 　　　 A. effective　　　　　　　B. impractical　　　　　 C. unrealizable　　　　 D. insufficient B Tales From Animal Hospital David Gram David Gram has become a familiar face to millions of fans of Animal Hospital. Here Dr Gram tells us the very best of his personal stories about the animals he has treated, including familiar patients such as the dogs Snowy and Duchess, the delightful cat Marigold Serendipity Diamond. He also takes the reader behind the scenes（在幕后）at Harmsworth Memorial Animal Hospital as he describes his day, from ordinary medical check-ups to surgery（外科手术）.Tales From Animal Hospital will delight all fans of the programme and anyone who has a lively interest in their pet, whether it be cat, dog or snake! 　　￡14.99Hardback 272pp Simon Schuster 　　ISBN 　　Lsaac Newton: The Last sorcerer 　　Michael White 　　From the author of Stephen Hawking: A Life in Science, comes this colorful description of the life of the world’s first modern scientist. Interesting yet based on fact. Michael White’s learned yet readable new book offers a true picture of Newton completely different from what people commonly know about him. Newton is shown as a gifted scientist with very human weaknesses who stood at the point in history where magic（魔术）ended and science began. 　　￡18.99 Hardback 320pp Fourth Estate 　　ISBN 　 Fermat’s Last Thcorem 　　Simon Singh 　　In 1963 a schoolboy called Andrew Wiles reading in his school library came across the world’s greatest mathematical problem: Fermat’s Last Theorem（定理）.First put forward by the French mathematician Pierre de Fermat in the seventeenth century, the theorem had baffled and beaten the finest mathematical minds, including a French woman scientist who made a major advance in working out the problem, and who had to dress like a man in order to be able to study at the Ecole Polytechnique. Through unbelievable determination（决心）Andrew Wiles finally worked out the problem in 1995. An unusual story of human effort over three centuries, Fermat’s Last Theorem will delight（使高兴）specialists and general readers alike. 　　￡12.99 Hardback 384pp Fourth Estate 　　ISBN 5. What is Animal Hospital? 　　A. A news story B. A popular book　　　　　　　 C. A research report　 D. A TV programme. 6. In Michael White’s book, Newton is described as　　　　. 　　A. a person who did not look the same as in many pictures B. a person who lived a colorful and meaningful life 　　C. a great but not perfect man　　　　　　　　 D. an old-time magician 7. The person who finally proved Fermat’s Last Theorem is　　  . 　　A. Simon Singh　B. Andrew Wiles C. pierre de Fermat D. a French woman scientist 8. What is the purpose of writing these three texts? 　　A. To make the books easier to read. 　　　　　B. To show the importance of science 　　C. To introduce new authors　　 D. To sell the books. Unit 2 Language Period 2 1. FTFTFFFTF 2 Old English:　Angles, Saxons, Jutes, Anglo-Saxon Middle English: 1066, took, control, Modern English: Latin, Greek, Pronunciation 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20　　　 BDABC 　　 DCCAB　　　BCDBD 　　 AABCA （二）1－10　　　 DADBC BBBAD （三）1.very→so 2.the去掉3.washing→wash 4.is→was 5.第一个I 改为me 6.different→same 7.√ 8.在learn 后加from 9.homeworks→homework 10.在saw后加what Period 3 二、课堂反馈 （一）1 vocabulary　 2 European　 3 throughout　　　4 official　 5 create　　　　6 nowadays 　　　 7 consists 　　　8 tribe / tribes （二）BCADAB 三、巩固练习 1－20　　　BAABA　　　DCCCA　　　CBCBD　　　CACCA （二）1－10　　　 BCBAD 　　 CCDCA Period 4 二、课堂反馈 （一）　1 factors 　　　 2 tongue 　　 3 replace 4 pronunciation 　5 adopt 6 control 　 7 rule 　　　 8 dialect 　　9 undergone 　　　10 process （二）1 He has made an important contribution to the company’s success. 2 The computer has made a great impact on modern life. 3 The accident resulted in two passengers dying. 4 He came to the meeting despite his illness. 5 She is a typical product of the upper class. 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　CDAAA　　　DBABC　　　CDBDB　　　DCABC （二）1－10 　ADDAC　　　BACDC （三）1 it’s 后加a　2 正确3 noon 后加when 4 them改为us 5visiting 改为visited 6　picture改为pictures  7 passes 改为passed  8去掉down 9 and 改为but 10去掉at Period 5 二、课堂反馈 Country Capital Language Location China Beijing Chinese Asia France Paris French Europe the USA Washington D.C. English America India New Delhi Hindi, English Asia Italy Rome Italian Europe Mexico Mexico City Spanish America Japan Tokyo Japanese Asia Spain Madrid Spanish Europe Singapore Singapore City Chinese, English Asia New Zealand Wellington English, Maori Oceania Sweden Stockholm Swedish Europe Australia Canberra English Oceania Switzerland Berne Portuguese Europe Egypt Cairo Arabic Africa Russia Moscow Russian Europe Argentina Buenos Aires Spanish America Germany Berlin German Europe Portugal Lisbon Portuguese Europe Norway Oslo Norwegian Europe Greece Athens Greek Asia Chile Santiago Spanish America 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20　　　 ABDCB 　　DBADB　 　 CBACB 　　 ADBBA （二）1－10　　　 BDCBC 　　 ADBDA Period 6 二、课堂反馈 DADAA 三、巩固练习 （一）1－18　　　 BDBDB　　　CCCCB　　　CBCAC　 　 ACB　　 （二）CDA B　BADB Period 7 课堂反馈 CBBAB　　 CDCAB　　　BABAD 三、巩固练习 （一）1—20　 CADBB　　　BDDAC　 　 ACABD　　　CBACB （二）1—20 　CDDA　　 　BBCD Period 8 二、课堂反馈 （一）DCABBB （二）1 spread 2 disagree 3 department 4 increasing 5 pure 6 standards 7 banned 8 phrases 9 easily 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　BAACD ADBBA  　　ACDBA　　　DBAAD （二）1－8 　　　 DABBC　　　DDA Period 9 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　BBACA 　　 DACDA　 　 ACCDA　 　 CDABD （二）1－8 　 　　DAAA　 　　BCDC （三）1 as→when　2 rings→rang　3 She→It　 4 a→the　　5 full前加was　 6 opening→opened  7 In→To　　　8 √  9 去掉about　 10 which→that　 Period 10 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　DBACA　　　BDCBB　　　DACDA　 　 CABDA  （二）1－10　　　 BCCDC 　　 CDABC Period 11 二、课堂反馈 1 represented 2 characters 3 combine 4 legend　5 differ 6 simplify 7 whole 8 originally 9 eventually 10 object 11 complex 12 writing 13 peak 14 developments 15 develops 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　DBCAA  　　AABAB　　　DCABC　　　DCADB （二）1－10　 　 DCCAC　 　 BCADC Period 12 二、课堂反馈 （一）1 prisoners 2 elements 3 symbol 4 direction 5 numerous 6 indicated （二）1 Chinese characters have meanings and can stand alone as words. 2 The first Chinese characters were pictograph. 3 Who is the boy sitting opposite you? 4 Simplified Chinese characters are widely used in mainland China. 5 Chinese people have invented numerous characters to represent ideas, objects or actions. 三、巩固练习 （一）1－20 　CBDBA  　　CBDDA　　　DBDCA　 　 BADCB （二）1－8 　　　 DDBD　　　 DCBD 江苏省南通市译林牛津版模块三Unit 3 Back to the past备课材料 1st Period  Welcome to the unit 双基提要 1. words：civilization, magnificent, structure, statue, hang, palace 2. Phrases： know about, protect cultural heritage, historical event 课堂反馈 背景阅读： The Hanging Gardens 　　The Hanging Gardens probably did not really “hang” in the sense of being suspended from cables or ropes. The name comes from an inexact translation of the Greek word “kremastos” or the Latin word “pensilis”, which mean not just “hanging”, but “overhanging” as in the case of a terrace or balcony. The Greek geographer Strabo, who described the gardens in first century BC, wrote, “It consists of vaulted terraces raised one above another, and resting upon cube-shaped pillars. These are hollow and filled with earth to allow trees of the largest size to be planted. The pillars, the vaults, and terraces are constructed of baked brick and asphalt.” “The ascent to the highest story is by stairs, and at their side are water engines, by means of which persons, appointed expressly for the purpose, are continually employed in raising water from the Euphrates into the garden.” Strabo touches on what, to the ancients, was probably the most amazing part of the garden. Babylon rarely received rain and for the garden to survive it would have had to been irrigated by using water from the nearby Euphrates River. That meant lifting the water far into the air so it could flow down through the terraces, watering the plants at each level. This was probably done by means of a “chain pump”. A chain pump is two large wheels, one above the other, connected by a chain. On the chain are hung buckets. Below the bottom wheel is a pool with the water source. As the wheel is turned, the buckets dip into the pool and pick up water. The chain then lifts them to the upper wheel, where the buckets are tipped and dumped into an upper pool. The chain then carries the empty ones back down to be refilled. The pool at the top of the gardens could then be released by gates into channels which acted as artificial streams to water the gardens. The pump wheel below was attached to a shaft and a handle. By turning the handle slaves provided the power to run the contraption. Construction of the garden wasn't only complicated by getting the water up to the top, but also by having to avoid having the liquid ruin the foundation once it was released. Since stone was difficult to get on the Mesopotamian plain, most of the architecture in Babel utilized brick. The bricks were composed of clay mixed with chopped straw and baked in the sun. The bricks were then joined with bitumen, a slimy substance, which acted as a mortar. These bricks quickly dissolved when soaked with water. For most buildings in Babel this wasn't a problem because rain was so rare. However, the gardens were continually exposed to irrigation and the foundation had to be protected. 巩固练习 一、完形填空 　 My daughter has been crazy about raising a pet for a long time. Last spring I bought two newly-hatched　chickens for her. She got (1) and took a good care of them. (2) a few days later, both chickens died. She burst into tears from (3) I helped her (4) the two birds under a tree behind our house. I thought it would be the　(5) of her ideas. 　 (6) I was wrong. Children are children (7). Their failure hasn’t (8) my daughter in any way.　She still tried to keep a small animal or even a snail. 　 One day last winter, I noticed under the eaves (屋檐)of the house a family of sparrows. My daughter and I could (9) the sparrows as our “pets”, but we didn’t. So I told her to (10) the grains on the windowsill. A few minutes later, the sparrow came to land on the windowsill (11) and pecked at the rice. Suddenly my daughter asked  me, “ Mum, can we catch and (12) the sparrows, and let them live with us in the room? How (13) it is for them to live outside?” 　　“Oh, my dear, I do not think it' s a good idea. You know. "I explained to her, "the sparrow is a bird who loves (14).  No one can keep them in a cage. If they are caught, they will (15) quickly. They are (16) to living outside. Moreover, they have warm nest under the eaves.” 　 From then on, we have got up a kind of (17) with the sparrow family. We feed them frequently and (18) them as pet birds. However, we do not need to (19) them. We　(20) seeing these little birds flying and jumping among branches, leaves and flowers in the spring mornings. 1.A. exciting　　　　B. excited　　　 C. disappointed　　　　　D. encouraged 2.A. Naturally　 　　B. Suddenly　　 　C. Unfortunately　　 　　D. Finally 3.A. excitement　　　B. feeling　　　 C. sorrow　　　　 　　D. heart 4.A. bury　　　 　　 B. put　　　　  　C. dig　　　　　　D. set 5.A. end　　　　　　 B. beginning　　 C. wish　　　　　  　D. reality 6.A. Thus　　　 　　 B. Then　　　　 　C. Therefore　　　 　　　D. However 7.A. at all　　　 　　　 B. in all　　　　 　 C. after all　　　　 　　D. for all 8.A. upset　　　　　 B. encourage　　 C. help　　　　　　　D. impress 9.A. look　　 　　　　B. act　　　　　 C. catch　　　　　　 D. feed 10.A. throw　　 　　 B. pour　　　　  C. pile　　　　　  　　　D. scatter 11.A. one after another　 B. one another　　　C. every other　　　　　 D. each other 12.A. stay　　　　　 B. cage　　　　 　C. love　　　　　  　D. watch 13.A. free　　　 　　B. happy　　　 　 C. cold　　　　　  　D. warm 14.A. freedom　 　　 B. spring　　　 　C. trees　　　　　 　　　D. flying 15.A. please　　 　　B. starve　　　 　C. suffer　　　　　 D. die 16.A. safe　　　 　　B. proud　　　 　 C. happy　　　　　　 D. used 17.A. neighbour　　　B. understanding　　 C. friendship　　　　　　D. relationship 18.A. think　　　　　B. dream　　　　　C. treat　　　　　 　　　D. appreciate 19.A. hurt　　　　　 B. possess　　　　C. belong to　　　　 D. hatch 20.A. enjoy　　 　　 B. would like　 　C. want　　　　　  　D. consider 二、阅读理解: Just like the Abu Simbel, in Aswan, Egypt, the Temple of Zhang Fei had to go upstream to a high place along the Yangtze River, as a result of the rising water level, as the Three Gorges Project(三峡工程) is being built. Standing for centuries on the northern bank of the Yangze River, the temple had showed the Three Kingdoms period (AD220-280) of China’s history. Before the project, the engineers had visited the Abu Simbel in Egypt. They would do as the ancient Egyptians had done. It will be rebuilt in its copy form. 　　On October 8, the temple was being torn down piece by piece. More than 300 workers and experts have been working round the clock. Bricks, wooden rails, stone figures, even time-worn stone steps have been removed with great care. Each piece if wrapped in cloth and loaded onto lorries(卡车，铁路货运) and ships and carried to the new temple site. The cost of the project is to be at least 70 million yuan. The new place is 32 kilometers upstream on the Yangtze. 　  Zhang Fei, a brave character, in the Three Kingdoms period in the Chinese classic Romance of the Three Kingdoms is a household name among the Chinese people. Especially the fishermen on the Yangtze River have worshiped(崇拜) Zhang as a god of protection. The temple is regarded as a cultural treasure and must see for the 200, 000 or so visitors each year. On October 4, thousands of visitors from him and abroad celebrated Zhang’s the 1,843rd birthday in the temple. 　　 Every removed part will be treated with marks and numbers to make sure that it is put back in its exact original place. 1.Which of the following is TRUE? Zhang Fei was a character about 2,000 years ago. The temple is moved only because of less visitors. The new place for the temple is very far from its original place. The engineers went to Egypt to learn some experience before removing the temple. 2.What does the underlined phrase in Paragraph 2 mean?  A. In the worksite　　　　　　 B. In a hurry  C. Day and night　　　　D. Without any meals. 3.Which of the following is Zhang Fei’s character?  A. Kind　　　　　B. Clever　　　　 C. Brave　　　 D. Foolish 4.Why is the temple moved? A. The temple is an old Chinese culture building. B. It is a must see for visitors in that area. C. It may be covered by water. D. All of the above. 三、单句改错： 1. Some of them have disappeared, while the others remain today. 2. My suggestion is that we must take action as soon as possible to protect cultural heritage. 3. You will be known for an artist before long. 4. The memorial was gradual buried by sandstorms. 5. We went to a lecture about Pompeii on this morning. 6. He as well as you are going to see me off at the airport. 7. Pompeii was destroied by a volcano. 8. My dream is that in some day I will become an archaeologist. 9. Mrs Fray is going to have a baby soon, so someone else will have to take of her classes. 10. The local people were so happy to find the missing boy lively in the forest. 2nd Period　Reading (1) 双基提要 1. words：lecture, volcano, erupt, ash, rock, unfortunately, bury, stone, director, mud 2. Phrases：the similarity between A and B， be made director of …, arrange for sb. to do sth. ,　feel lucky to do sth.,　 be known as , go to a lecture , take over , be buried alive,　as it be , dig for treasure ,cause damage, on rainy days 3. Sentence structure: 1) I feel lucky to have won a place on this trip. 2) So in 1860, the Italian archaeologist Giuseppe Fiorelli was made director of the Pompeii dig. 3）I saw streets just as they had been,…. 课堂反馈 一、基础短语翻译 1．保护文化遗产_____________________________________ 2．A和B之间相似之处_______________________________ 3．被选为主管_______________________________________ 4．去听讲座_________________________________________ 5．夺取；接管_______________________________________ 6．被活埋___________________________________________ 7．造成危害_________________________________________ 8．在雨天___________________________________________ 二、单词拼写： 1. Things ____________(逐渐) improved. 2. It’s good to get back to ____________(文明) after living in a tent in the remote area for two weeks. 3. It’s many years since Mount Vesuvius last _________(爆发). 4.___________(不幸的是), we arrived too late to catch the place. 5. I work for a __________(商业的) radio station. 6. The policeman let me off with a l_________ about speeding. 7. He was very attentive with his head b_________ in a newspaper. 8. Chen Kaige is one of the famous d________ in China. 9. The terrible fire d_________ most of the buildings within 20 minutes. 10. Building m_________ are very expensive nowadays. 三、单项选择： 1. According to the manager, the business plan will help the company _____ other small businesses and help them become the number one business over the next 50 years. 　A. take out　　 B. take control　　　C. take over　　　　  D. rule out 2. Tom Hanks first became famous ______ his excellent acting in the film Splash. He is now well known ____ a two-time Oscar winner. 　A. as; as　　　　　B. for; for　 　 C. to; for　　　　　D. for; as 3. If you buy more than ten, they knock 20 pence off ________. 　 A. a price　　 B. price　　　 　C. the price　　　  D. prices 4. The most important thing about ancient civilizations is _______ part that they played in _____history. 　A. 不填；不填　 B. the; 不填　　 C. the; the　　　 　　　D. a; the 5. ----Do you like ______here? 　----Oh, yes. The air, the weather, the way of life. Everything is so nice. 　A. this　　　　 B. these　　　　 C. that　　　　　D. it 6. Havard University was ______ in 1636 and named after John Harvard, who left his library to the school after his death. 　A. discovered　 B. found　　　　　C. founded 　　 D. finding　 　 7. It’s many years since Mount Vesuvius last _________. 　A. discovered　 B. happened　　　 C. erupted　　D. came about 8.----Have you moved into the new flat? 　 ---Not yet. The rooms _____________. 　A. are painted　　 　B. are painting　　　　 C. have been painted　 D. are being painted 9. He _____ his fellow-workers at the union meeting yesterday. 　 A. presented　　　B. represented　　　 C. spoke　　　D. performed 10. Mr. Bush is on time for everything. How ______ it be that he was late for the opening ceremony? 　 A. can　　　　 B. should　　　　 C. may　　 D. must 11.---Hurry up! Alice and Sue are waiting for you at the school gate. 　 ---Oh! I thought they _______ without me. 　 A. went　　　　B. are going　　　C. have gone　 D. had gone 12. Shanghai is really a fascinating city and we’ve decided to stay for ______ two weeks. A. another　　 B. other　　　　　C. the other　 D. other’s 巩固练习 一．单项选择 1. The teacher, with 6 girls and 8 boys of her class, ______ visiting a museum when the earthquake struck.  A. was　　　　　 B. were　　　　　 C. had been　 　D. would be 2. Peter will ______ as managing director when Bill retires.  A. take up　　　 B. take in　　　　C. take off　 　D. take over 3. Many people are still buried ____ after the earthquake.  A. living　　B. alive　　　　　C. lively　　 　D. live 4. Nobody can _____ us _____ getting married. Which of the following is wrong?  A. protect; from B. prevent; from　C. forbid; /　 D. keep; from 5. The house was completely ______ by fire.  A. damaged　　　 B. destroyed　　　C. caused　　 D. beaten 6.______ for him, the police had been informed and were waiting outside.  A. Happily　　　 B. Unfortunately　 C. Fortunately　 D. Waiting 7. I don’t think there _____ some problems with his body.  A. be　　　　B. used to being　 C. exist　　　　 D. is 8. Mr. Brown is a world-famous professor who is ____ in experience.  A. wealthy　　　 B. rich　　　　　 C. well off　　　D. wealth 9. The evidence was gradually covered ____ by the heavy snow that night.  A. with　　　　　B. in　　　　　　 C. over　　　　　D. up 10. The lady ______ herself Mary was the hostess of this party.  A. called　　B. who was called C. calling　　　 D. was called 11.A society arranged ______ several students _____ an expedition.  A. by; to go on　B. for; go on　　　C. by; going on　D. for; to go on 12.I find the _____ of buildings _____ under the sand.  A. remaining; buried　　 B. remainders, bury  C. remains; buried　　　　 D. remains, burying 13. They want to see how civilized she can ________.  A. experience　　B. change　　 C. develop 　　　 D. become 二、阅读理解 A 　　For thousands of years, man has enjoyed the taste of apples. Apples, which are about 85 percent water, grow almost everywhere in the world but the hottest or coldest areas. Among the leading countries in apples production are China, France and the United States. There’re different kinds of apples, but a very few make up the majority of those grown for sale. The three most common kinds grown in the United States are Delicious, Golden Delicious and McIntosh. 　  Apples are different in color, size and taste. The color of the skin may be red, green or yellow. They are of different size, with Delicious apples being among the largest. The taste may be sweet or tart. Generally, sweet apples are eaten fresh while tart apples are used to make apple sauce. 　  Apple trees may grow as tall as twelve meter. They do best in areas that have very cold winters. Although no fruit is yielded during the winter , the cold period is good for the tree. 1. Which of the following word can take the place of the word “yielded” in the third paragraph?  A. Planted　 　B. Produced　　 C. Grew　　　　D. Harvested 2. According to the passage, which country is not considered to be large producers of apples?  A. China　  B. America　　　 C. France 　D. the United Kingdom 3. It can be learned from the text that Delicious apples are ______.  A. grown in China　 　B. sold everywhere C. very big　 D. quite sweet 4. Apple trees can _______.  A. grow as tall as twelve meters　　 B. grow everywhere in the world  C. not grow in areas that have very cold winters  D. grow in the hottest or coldest areas   三、句子翻译 1. 能够代表我们班全体同学在这里讲话，我感到非常幸运。(feel lucky to) 2. 他是公认的大歌唱家。(be known as) 3. 他每星期去听两次关于外太空物理方面的讲座。（go to a lecture） 4. 不幸的是，全城的人都被活埋了，整座城市也被掩埋了。（be buried alive） 5. 我发现要和像他这样的一个人相处融洽不是件容易的事。(find it hard to do sth.) 6. 我们应该尽快采取行动来阻止这条河流受到污染。(prevent …from) 7. 这辆旧车给我添了不少麻烦。(cause + n. + n.) 8. 很难想象她一个人照顾五个孩子的艰辛。（It’s hard to imagine） 3rd Period　Reading (2) 双基提要 1. words：body, destroy, house, wealthy, commercial, gradually, cultural, institute, ruin, remains, paint, pot, material, document, temple, workshop 2. Phrases：be off to … , house sth. ,  neither … nor…, find sth. interesting , run through , prevent…from …,　be used for , as well as, take control of , provide space for,　be destroyed by… 3. Sentence structures: 1) It is believed by many people to have been gradually covered over by sandstorms from AD 200 to AD 500. 2) We found the ruins most interesting.　 课堂反馈 一、单项选择 1. There ____ nothing but some desks and chairs in the room. 　A. is　　　 B. are　　 C. be　　　　D. has been 2. The old ______. 　A. need respecting　　　　 　　　B. needs respecting 　C. need to respect　　　　 　 D. needs to be respected 3. Over 80 percent of the population of China ______ peasants. 　A. is　　　 B. are　　 C. was　　　　　 D. be 4. Tom as well as two of his classmates ____ invited to the party. 　A. was　　　B. were　　　 C. has　　　　　 D. have 5. Reading books every day _____ a good habit in learning a language. 　A. will　　 B. are　　 C. is　　　　D. has 6. Not only I but also Mary and Tom _____ tired after a long walk. 　A. was　　　B. is　　　　 C. were　　　　　D. have 7. Two-thirds of time _____ spent on books. 　A. has　　　B. have　　　 C. is　　　　D. are 8. The United States ______ in America. 　A. is　　　 B. are　　 C. lie　　　　　 D. lays 9. The books lie _____ on the floor. 　A. opened　 B. opening C. open　　　　　D. close 10. When we ___ down from the hill, it had _____ dark. 　A. turned; turned　　　B. got; got 　C. were; been　 　　　 D. became; became 11. Among the passengers _____ the judge of our district, Mr J.C. Smith. 　 A. was　　 B. were　　　 C. are　　　　D. be 12. Tom is one of the students who _____ on time. 　 A. is　　　B. am　　　C. are　　　　D. was 13. Either you or the headmaster ____ the prize to these gifted students at the meeting. 　 A. is handing out　　　　　　　  B. are to hand out 　 C. are handing out　　　　　　　 D. is to hand out 14. A library with five thousand books ____ to the nation as a gift. 　 A. is donated　B. has donated　 C. are donated　　D. have donated 15. All that can be done ________. 　 A. has been done　　B. have been done　 　 C. have done　　　 D. has done 巩固练习 一、完形填空： Susan Cleveland is the young president of a candy company in the city of Chicago. Her father began the company in the 1960's. He died three years ago. Now, the company belongs to Susan. Susan,　 1　 , did not have any jobs before becoming head of the company. She just finished the college. The employees(雇员) became　 2　 concerned during Susan's first months　 3　 the job. Mr Cleveland had been a　 4　 leader. But Susan permitted　 5　 employees to make their own　 6　. One employee said, “Old Mr Cleveland　 7　 told us what to do. He kept people on a short leash.　 _8　the company did well.” What does a “short leash” mean? A leash is a kind of rope. We use a leash　 9　 our pet dogs. The leash keeps the dog from　10　 away　 11　getting into trouble. Keeping a person on a short leash means keeping him or her　12　　close control. The person can't make many decisions for himself or herself. Mr Cleveland does not keep her workers on a short leash.  13　, she encourages them to get　 14　 ways to do business. For example, her secretary proposed(建议) an idea. She said the company should　 15　 a sum of money as a prize to the best student in the high school　 16　 the factory. The winner could used the prize money to study at a university. Mr Cleveland　 17　 the idea. After the prize was announced,　18　who lived in the area of the factory began to buy　 19　 of the company's candy. Local newspapers wrote about the competition. Business　 20　. Ms Cleveland made her secretary the company's first Director of Public Relations. The former secretary was very pleased. 1. A. but　　　　　  　　B. yet　　　　　　 　C. so　　　　　　　  D. however 2. A. so little　　　　　B. even less　　　　 C. even more　　　　 D. no more 3. A. on　　　　　　 　　B. in　　　　　　 　 C. for 　　　　　　　D. at 4. A. weak　　　　　 　　B. strong　　　　  　C. kind　　　　　　  D. clever 5. A. no　　　　　　 　　B. a few　　　　　  C. few　　　　　 D. many 6. A. products　　　　　 B. candy　　　　　  C. decisions　　　 　D. plans 7. A. never　　　 　　　 B. always　　　　　  　　C. seldom　　　　 D. did 8. A. Although　　　 　　B. Because　　　　  C. Otherwise　　　　 D. But 9. A. to walk　　　　 　 B. to use　　　　　  　　C. to frighten　　　 D. to play 10. A. stepping　　　　B. pulling　　　　　 　C. running　　　　　 D. jumping 11. A. in　　　　　　 B. for　　　　　　  　　C. when　　　　　 　 D. or 12. A. in　　　　　　 B. on　　　　　　  C. for　　　　　　　 D. under 13. A. Still　　　　　 B. Yet　　　　　　  　 C. Instead　　　　　 D. While 14. A. other　　　　　 　B. more　　　　　　 C. many　　　　 　D. better 15. A. save　　　　　  　B. offer　　　　　　 　　C. get　　　　　 D. lend 16. A. belonging to　　 B. far from　　　　　 　 C. near　　　　  D. in 17. A. studied　　　　 　B. appreciated　　　　 C. refused　　　 D. changed 18. A. students　　　　 B. workers　　　　　 　　C. businessmen　　D. people　 19. A. some　　　　　 　 B. little　　　　　　  C. more　　　　  D. less 20. A. improved　　　　　B. failed　　　　　　 　 C. continued　　 D. stopped 二、阅读理解 A few months ago some men robbed a bank in central London. One quite weekend they broke into the shop next to it. Then they made a hole in the wall and got into the bank. One of their friends was watching the bank from a flat on the other side of the road. He had the duty of telling the men inside if there was any danger. The men talked to each other by radio, and someone else heard their conversation. The police were told. But they couldn’t find the right bank. The robbers escaped with a lot of money. Amateur radio people, or “hams”, as they are usually called, listen to radio station all over the world. Short wave bands are used in order to transmit over a long distance. They are also used for transmitting such things as telegrams and newspaper pictures. The criminals were using a short wave band, and a ham with the right equipment could listen to it easily. The result was that the bank robbers were nearly caught. Not much equipment is needed for receiving, and it is fairly cheap. Some hams also want to transmit, but transmitting equipment is expensive. A special license is needed too. Before that is given, a ham has to pass some examinations. Then he can transmit on a few special wave bands. Hams make friends with other hams all over the world, but the only things they seem to talk about is their equipment.　 (247 words) 1. From this passage we know a ham is ________ . A. a robber　　　　　　　　　　　  B. a kind of short wave C. a person who uses short wave　　　 D. a person who is fond of radio 2. Some men robbed a bank_______.　　　　　 . A. by breaking into the bank with guns B. by breaking into a shop next to the bank C. with the help of a man listening to radio stations all over the world D. with someone watching the bank from a shop next to the bank 3. The robbers escaped with a lot of money because _________.　　　　 A. the police did not know a bank was being robbed B. nobody could understand the radio conversation on the radio C. the police couldn’t discover where the robbers were D. the police found somebody else robbing a bank 4. Messages can be transmitted　　　　　  on short wave bands. A. only to the police　　　　　　  B. to banks C. only to friends nearby　　　　  D. over a long distance 5. What is the best title for this text?　　　　　 A. How do robbers work?　　　　  B. Radio Waves. C. Robbers.　　　　　　　　　　 D. Good Escape. 三、短文改错 There are advantage for students of work while　　　　　　　1.__________ studying at school. One of them was that they 　　　　　　　2.__________ can earn money. For the most part,　　　　　　　 　　　 3.__________ students working to earn money for their own　　　　　　4.__________ use. Earning their own money allow them 　　　　　　　　5.__________ to spend on anything as if they please.　　　　　　　　　　 6.__________ They would have to ask their parents for　　　　　　　　7.__________ money or for permission to do things by　　　　　　　　 8.__________ the money. Some students may also to save　　　　　　　 9.__________ up for our college of future use.　　　　　　　　　　　 10.__________  4th Period　Reading (3) 双基提要 日记类文章的阅读方法和技巧。 课堂反馈 单项选择： 1._____ one of the most important inventions of the time, the computer helps people living in different countries to do a lot of things. 　A. Knowing to be　　B. It was known　C. Known as　 D. As was known to be　 2. At the meeting , Mr. Li was made ______of the club to _______the duties of Mr. Zhang, who was retiring soon. A. a chairman, take up　　 B. a chairman, take over　 C. chairman, take up　　　D. chairman, take over 3. The enemy soldiers were so cruel that they buried him _____. 　 A. live　 B. lively　C. living　D. alive 4. ----Will you go now? ----Not until I ______my experiment. A. have finished　 B . will finish　C. will have finished　D. had finished 5. To our surprise, the painting considered _____ should have won the prize. A. copying　 B. having copied　C. to have been copied　D. to have copied 6. She was so angry that she kicked a chair and broke one of its legs, _____ was rather surprising. A. as　 B. it　 C. that　 D. which 7. This is so difficult a question ____________. A. that none of us can answer　 B. as none of us can answer it C. which none of us can answer　 D. as none of us can answer 8. ______is known to all, China is a large country with ________. A. It, ancient civilization,　　　　　　 B. As, an ancient civilization 　C. That, an ancient civilization　　　　 D. As, ancient civilization 9. ______by the mountains around, the village looks even more beautiful at this time of the year. A. To be surrounded　B. Surrounded　C. Being surrounded　 D. Surrounding 10. ---You seem to have learned all the new words by heart. ---_______. A. So do I　　B. So I have　 C. So seem I　 D. So I do 11. The shoes _____mine. This pair of shoes _____my brother’s. A. are, is　　B. is, is　　 C. are, are　 D. is, are 12. Those who let children who are _____go swimming in the river are foolish. A. so young　B. too young to　C. not old enough to　D. young enough 13. Many workers were organized to clear away ____remained of the World Trade Center. A. those　 B. that　C. what　D. where 14. It was quite a long time ____ he really realized the serious situation. A. since　 B. when　C. after　 D. before 15.----Were you late for the film? 　 ---Very late. Half of it ____ by the time we ____ the cinema. A. was shown, reached　　　　　 　　B. had been shown, reached C. was shown, had reached　　　　　 D. had been shown, had reached 巩固练习 一、阅读理解： A Every year thousands of tourists visit Pompeii, Italy.　They see the sight that Pompeii is famous for––its stadium (运动场) and theaters, its shops and restaurants. The tourists do not, however, see Pompeii’s people. They do not see them because Pompeii has no people. No one has lived in Pompeii for almost 2,000 years. Once Pompeii was a busy city of 22,000 people. It lay at the foot of Mount Vesuvius, a grass-covered volcano (火山).Mount Vesuvius had not erupted (喷发)for centuries, so the people of Pompeii felt safe. But they were not. In August of AD 79, Mount Vesuvius erupted. The entire top of the mountain exploded, and a huge black cloud rose into the air. Soon stones and hot ash began to fall on Pompeii. When the eruption ended two days later, Pompeii was buried under 20 feet of stones and ashes. Almost all of its people were dead. For centuries, Pompeii lay buried under stone and ash. Then in the year 1861, an Italian scientist named Ginseppe began to uncover Pompeii. Slowly, carefully, Ginseppe and his men dug. The city almost the same as it had looked in AD 79. There were streets and fountains, houses and shops. There was a stadium with 20,000 seats. Perhaps the most important of all, there were everyday objects, which tell us a great deal about the people who lived in Pompeii. Many glasses and jars had some dark blue color in the bottom, so we know that the people of Pompeii liked wine. They liked bread, too; metal bread pans were in every bakery. In one bakery there were 81round, flat loaves of bread––a type of bread that is still sold in Italy today. Tiny boxes filled with a dark, shiny powder tell us that women liked to wear eye-makeup. Ginseppe has died, but his work continues. One-fourth has not been uncovered yet. Scientists are still digging, still making discoveries that draw the tourists to Pompeii. 1. Why do large number of people come to Pompeii each year? 　A. To visit the volcano　　　　　　　  B. To shop and eat there C. To watch sports and plays　　　　  D. To see how Pompeii lived 2. Why had so many Pompeiians remained by volcanic Mount Vesuvius? A. The city nearby offered all kinds of fun　　　　 B. The area produced the finest wine in Italy C. Few people expected the volcano to erupt again D. The mountain was beautiful and covered with grass 3. Why did the city uncovered look like almost the same as it had looked in AD 79? A. Because Ginseppe and his men dug it slowly and carefully B. Because the city was buried alive and remained untouched C. Because scientists successfully rebuilt the city with everyday objects D. Because nobody had lived in the city ever since the volcano erupted 4. What do we know about the Pompeiians who lived 2,000 years ago? A. They lived more or less the same as Italians now do B. They liked women wearing all kinds of makeup C. They enjoyed a lazy life with drinking and tearing D. They went back to Pompeii after the eruption in AD 79. B Death Valley is one of the most famous deserts in the United States, covering a wide area with its alkali(碱性) sand. Almost 20 percent of this area is well below sea level, and Badwater, a salt water pool, is about 280 feet below sea level and the lowest point in the United States. Long Ago the Panamint Indians called this place “Tomesha”—the land of fire. Death Valley’s present name dates back to 1849, when a group of miners coming across from Nevada became lost in its unpleasantness and hugeness and their adventure turned out to be a sad story. Today Death Valley has been declared a National Monument and is crossed by several well-marked roads where good service can be found easily. Luckily the change created by human settlement has hardly ruined the special beauty of this place. Here nature created a lot of surprising, almost like the sights on the moon, ever-changing as the frequent wind moves the sand about, showing the most unusual colors. One of the most astonishing and variable parts of Death Valley is the Devil's Golf Course, where it seems hard for one to tell reality from terrible dreams. Sand sculptures stand on a frightening ground, as evening shadows move and lengthen. 1. ___is the lowest place in the desert. 　A. Tomesha　　 B. Death Valley　C. Nevada　 D. Badwater 2. The name of the valley comes from ___. A. an Indian name　　　　　　　　　　　  B. the death of the miners　 C. the local people　　　　　　　　　　　  D. a National Movement 3. From the passage we can learn that ___. A. no one had ever known the desert before the miner　　　　 　B. it’s still not easy to travel across the desert C. people can find gas-stations, cafes and hotels in the desert　　 　D. people have changed the natural sight in the desert 4. Devil Golf Course is famous for ___. A. the frequent　wind　　　　　　　　　　　  B. the colors of the sand　　　 　C. dream-like sights　　　　　　　　　　　　  D. the sand sculptures 5. From the passage we can see that the writer ___the Death Valley. 　A. appreciates　B. is fearful of　　　C. dislikes　　D. is tired of 二、单句改错： 1. The city of Pompeii was found in the 8th century BC. 2. This is one of the museums in the world housed many treasures of historical importance. 3. Most of us found the film the most interesting of all those that we have ever seen. 4. A woman, together with six children, are waiting in the cold at the station. 5. He did not come to the party, and which was a pity. 6. Neither could the man eat, nor he could drink. 7. Not until the war was over he was able to go back to work. 8. Columbus is considered to discover the New World. 9. Such books that the teacher mentioned are well worth reading. 10. We will never forget the place where we visited last week. 11. We still don’t know how the volcanic eruption damaged the whole city of Pompeii. 12. When asking the question, the man made no direct answer. 5th Period　Word Power 双基提要 Words: crowd，deer，sheep，insect，herd，flock，pack，bunch， swarm, remain， archaeology，　archaeological，　archaeologist，　appear，　preserve Phrases: get a close look at　 in twos　refer to　throughout the world　over the past few years　be involved in　be related to Sentence structures:  All of them wanted to be the first to get a close look at Mount Vesuvius. 课堂反馈 一、根据首字母或中文提示完成下列单词拼写题 1. Bees, ants and flies belong to i________. 2. All the illegal advertisements in the streets should be r______ t once. 3. S______ of bees are flying near the bee-hives. 4. When foreigners are at Chinese dinner table, they often find it embarrassed to use c_______. 5. Who is the first one to have d________ the continent of America? 6. It is a good habit to b________ our teeth after each meal. 7. There are still many things r________ to be settled. The manger feel worried. 8. The _________(历史的)place of interest receives millions of tourists every year. 二、根据汉语翻译下列句子： 1. 他就是你刚才提到的那篇小说的作者。   2. 那位老人是第一个见证这场灾难的人。 3. 我看到一群人围在事故现场但没人上去帮助。 4. 在过去的十年里，中国已发生了翻天覆地的变化。 5. 你得格外小心，不能损坏任何你发现的东西。 6. 跟此案有关的所有事实都已被调查过。 巩固练习 一、单项填空 1. The last man ________ the sinking ship was the captain. A. left　　B. to be leaving　　C. to leave　　D. leaves 2. Mrs Flower’s house has now been sold. It only _____ for me to pass all the money to the right person. A. remains　　B. needs　　C. wants　　D. requires 3. Do let you mother know all the truth. She appears _______ everything. A. to tell　　B. to be told　　C. to be telling　　D. to have been told 4. In Britain, sales of cigarettes _________ by 30% in the last ten years. A. have reduced　　B. have been reduced　　C. were reduced　 D. reduced 5. Computers are one of the greatest inventions in the modern world that ______ the human beings. A. has benefited　　B have benefited　 C. will benefit　 D. would benefit 6. On __________ my dictionary, I found one page missing. A. referring to　　B referred to　　C. being referred to　　D. being referring to 7. When we make decisions, we should learn to ______ the results ______ the cause. A. think, of　　 B. come, with　　C. put, to　　D. relate, to 8. ---I really appreciate _______ to holiday with you on this nice island. ---It’s my pleasure. 　A. have time　　B. having time　　C. to have time　　D. to having time 9. _______ running, learning English needs will. A. As with　　B. As to　　C. As for　　D. As if 10. When people talk about the cities of France, the first ______ comes into their mind is Paris. A. city　　B. one　　C. that　　D. of them 二、完形填空： 　 The story goes that some time ago, a man had a very lovely little daughter. One day the man 11 his 3-year-old daughter for 12 a roll of gold wrapping paper. Money was tight and he became 13 when the child tried to decorate a 14 to put under the Christmas tree. 15, the little girl brought the gift to her 16 the next morning and said, “ This is for you, Daddy.” 　 The man was 17 by his earlier 18　, but his anger flared again when he found out the box was 19. He yelled at her, stating, “Don’t you know, when you give someone a present, there is 20 to be inside?” The little girl looked 21 at him with tears in her eyes and cried, “ Oh, Daddy, it’s not empty 22. I blew kisses into the box.. They are all for you, Daddy.” 　The father was crushed. He 23 his arms around his little girl, and he begged for her 24. 　Only a short time later, an 25 took the life of the child. It is also told that her father kept that gold box by his bed for many 26 and whenever he was discouraged, he would take a (n) 27 kiss and remember the love of the child who had put it there. 　 In a very real sense, each one of us, as human beings, have been given a gold container 28　 with unconditional love and kisses……from our children, family members, friends, and God. There is simply no other　29, anyone could hold, more 30 than this.　　　 11.　A. asked　　　　  B. praised　　　　  C. begged　　　　D. punished 12.　A. wasting　　　　B. damaging　　　　C. selling　　　　　 D. holding 13.　A. glad　　　　　 B. angry　　　　　 C. sad　　  　　　D. upset 14.　A. room　　　　  B. hall　　　　　　 C. box　　　　　  D. ball 15.　A. Nevertheless　　B. But　　　　　　 C. Therefore　　　 D. And 16.　A. father　　　　  B. mother　　　　  C. teacher　　　　 D. sister 17.　A. puzzled　　　　B. surprised　　　　 C. scared　　　　  D. embarrassed 18.　A. overwork　　　B. overreaction　　  　 C. overcoat　　　　D. overpass 19.　A. empty　　　　 B. heavy　　　　  　C. full　　　　   D. wet 20.　A. happened　　　B. seemed　　　　  C. supposed　　　  D. used 21.　A. down　　　　 B. back　　　　　　 C. up　　　　　　 D. forward 22.　A. at all　　　　 B. after all　　　　　 C. above all　　　　D. in all 23.　A. put　　　　　 B. turned　　　　　 C. handed　　　　  D. gave 24.　A. kindness　　　B. forgiveness　　　 C. sadness　　　　  D. carelessness 25.　A. overcoat　　　B. incident　　　　  C. accident　　　　 D. action 26.　A. days　　　　 B. months　　　　　 C. nights　　　　  D. years 27.　A. imaginary　　 B. kind　　　　　　 C. gentle　　　　  D. warm 28.　A. filled　　　　 B. pleased　　　　　 C. crowded　　　 D. equipped 29.　A. world　　　  B. feeling　　　　　  C. possession　　 D. love 30.　A. expensive　　 B. precious　　　　  C. comfortable　　 D. interesting　　 三．阅读理解  A The world “ Solon” has come to be a nickname for a lawyer, but few people know that Solon (639 to 599 B.C.) was an actual person, one of the most famous and respected lawmakers of Athens. He was known as one of the “ seven wise men of Greece”. Solon was given right to change laws to help a country in need of reform. The government assumed political powers. He also got help from courts in which citizens could appeal (上诉) official decisions. Any citizen who even didn’t belong to any class of society could become a member of the public law courts. The rich and the theoretically had equal rights. 　  However, Solon did not establish a democracy, but an oligarchy. Only citizens of the high classes could hold public office and only citizens of the very highest class could hold the leadership. It is interesting to compare ancient Greece with America today. In America, while nearly all citizens can vote, even those from the very lowest class. However, it certainly may be true that only those from the highest, or wealthiest class are elected to the highest offices of the country. 　  According to historians, Solon was away from the country for 10 years. When he returned, he found that the country was at war with itself. Peisistratus became the leader. In history, Peisistratus was famous as a tyrant(暴君). Every person wants to know whether mankind is doomed(命中注定) to repeat its mistakes forever. One group suggests that members of congress be elected for a six-year term. At the end of that term, each congress person will decide whether he should be appointed for life or not. If it came about, these persons should do their best to support the true interest of the people, rather than worry about his own political future. 31. What does the author actually suggest in the 1st paragraph? A. In fact the rich and the poor did not have equal political right. B. In fact the rich and the poor had equal political right. C. In his opinion the rich and the poor had equal political right. D. In the historians’ opinion the rich and the poor had equal political right. 32. Based on the information given in the passage, what does word “oligarchy” mean? A. government controlled by the highest class of citizens. B. government in which people of all classes are treaded equally. C. government in which all people can change law. D. government in which citizens of the high classes can share the rights. 33. The writer uses Congress in America as an example because he wants to say that _____. A. America is well-developed nation of democracy. B. America may be the same oligarchy as ancient Greece was. C. All Americas have the equal rights to be elected to the highest offices. D. The voting laws of America allow more and more people to vote. 34. The writer purpose in writing this passage is to _____. A. present the truth that only highest class rules any society B. explain the progress of making laws and a way of life and politics C. put forward a possible problem and suggest a solution to it D. compare the society of modern America to that of ancient Greece     6th period  Grammar (1) 双基提要 1. Words: occur 2. Phrases:  agree with,　 drive sb. crazy,　 shouldn’t have done,　take the time 3. Introduction of object complement 课堂反馈 一、根据汉语翻译下列句子： 1. 那天出人意料地发生了那个事情。 2. 很高的噪音回让人发疯。 3. 那天你不应该指责他，他毕竟还是个小孩。 4. 动词在人称和数上应与主语一致。 5. 他经常抽出时间来帮助孩子辅导功课。 巩固练习 一、单项填空 1. The manager discussed the plan that they would like to see ______ the next year. A. carry out　 B. carrying out　　C. carried out　　D. to carry out 2. Because of my poor English I’m afraid I can’t make myself ________. A. understand  B. to understand　 C. understanding　 D. understood 3. The missing boys was last seen _______ near the river. A. playing　 B. to be playing　 C. play　 D. to play 4. ------ Good morning. Can I help you? ------ I’d like to have this package _______, madam. A. be weighed　　 B. to be weighed　 C. to weigh　 D. weighed 5. The teacher stood there, angry, with his arms ______ . A. to cross　　B. crossing　　C. crossed　　D. to be crossed 6. The modern science can keep us _________ with latest news continuously. A. supply　 B supplied　　C. being supplied　　D. supplying 7. The sudden strong wind sent all the fallen leaves ______ in all direction. A. flying　 B. fly　　C. to fly　　D. being flying 8. His parents were killed in the cruel war, ____________. A. leave him an orphan　　B. leave him to be an orphan C. leaving him an orphan　D. to leave him an orphan 9. His words ______ him so angry that he shouted like crazy. A. drove　 B. kept　　C. got　 D. set 10. Those who were present at the meeting all elected him _________of the board. A. to be chairman　 B. chairman　 C. the chairman　 D. to be the chairman 二、 完形填空： Little Chad was a shy, quiet young man. One day he came home and told his mother that he'd like to make a valentine（情人节贺卡）for　11  in his class. Her _12　sank. She thought, "I　13　he  wouldn't do that!" because she had　14  the children when they walked home from school. Her Chad was always　15  them. They　16　and hung on to each other and talked to each other. But Chad was never included． 17 , she decided she would go along with her son.　18  she bought the paper and glue and crayons（蜡笔）. For three weeks, night after night, Chad painstakingly（辛苦地） made 35 valentines. Valentine's Day came, and Chad was beside himself　19 excitement. He　20  stacked（叠） them up, put them in a bag, and went out of the door. His mother decided to bake him his favorite cookies and serve them nice and warm with a cool glass of　21　when he came home from school. She just knew he would be　22　and maybe that would ease（减轻） the pain a little. It  23　her to think that he wouldn't get many valentines – maybe　24　at all. That afternoon she had the cookies and milk on the table. When she heard the children outside, she looked out of the window. Sure enough,  25　they came, laughing and having the best time. And,　 26　always, there was Chad in the rear（后面）. He walked a little faster than usual. She fully expected him to burst into　27  as soon as he got inside. She  28　his arms were　29 , and when the door opened she choked back the tears. "Mommy has some cookies and milk for you," she said．But he　30  heard her words. He just marched right on by, his face aglow（炽热）, and all he could say was: "Not a one. Not a one. ”Her heart sank. And then he added, "I didn't forget a one, not a single one!" 11. A. anyone 　　B. anybody　　　C. all　 　 　　　　D. everyone 12. A. heart　　 B. mind　　　　　C. head 　　　　D. brain 13. A. wish　 　　B. hope　 　　　C. expect　 　　　　D. think 14. A. looked　　 B. seen　　　　　C. noticed　　 　　D. watched 15. A. behind 　　B. after　　　　C. before　 　　　　D. ahead of 16. A. chatted　 B. laughed　　 C. ran 　 　　　　　　D. jumped 17. A. But　　　 B. Besides 　C. However　　　　 D. Therefore 18. A. So　　　　　B. Yet　　　 　C. Even　　 　　　 D. But 19. A. at　　　　　B. with　　　  C. by　　　 　　　 D. for 20. A. slowly 　　B. carefully　　 C. quickly　　　　D. calmly 21. A. coffee　　　B. tea　　　　 C. water　　　　　 D. milk 32. A. happy　　 B. surprised　　 C. discouraged　 D. disappointed 23. A. made 　　　B. hurt　　　　 C. harmed　　　　　D. frightened 24. A. none　 　　B. nothing　　　C. no one　　 　　 D. neither 25. A. here　  　 B. where　　　 C. there　　　　　　D. so 26. A. as　　　　 B. like　　　 　C. when　　　　 D. where 27. A. room　　 　B. laughter　　　C. tears　　　　 D. arms 28. A. saw 　　B. watched　　　 C. looked　　 　　D. noticed 29. A. empty　　　B. full　　　 　 C. filled　　　　　　 D. free 30. A. hardly　 　B. almost　 　　 C. never　　　　　D. often 三. 阅读理解：　　　　　  A It is natural that young people are often uncomfortable when they are with their parents. They say that their parents don’t understand them. They often think that their parents are out of touch with modern ways, that they are too serious and too strict with their children, and they seldom give their children a free hand. It is true that parents often find it difficult to win their children’s trust and they tend to forget how they themselves felt when young. For example, young people like to act on the spot without much thinking. It is one of their ways to show that they have grown up and they can face any difficult situation. Older people worry more easily. Most of them plan things ahead, at least in the back of their minds, and do not like their plans to be upset by something unexpected. When you want your parents to let you do something, you will have better success if you ask before you really start doing it. Young people often make their parents angry with their choice in clothes, in entertainment and in music. But they do not mean to cause any trouble: it is just that they feel cut off from the older people’s world, into which they have not yet been accepted. That’s why young people want to make a new culture of their own, and if their parents do not like their music or entertainment or clothes or their way of speech, this will make the young people extremely happy. Sometimes you are so proud of yourself that you do not want your parents to say, “Yes” to what you do. All you want is to be felt alone and do what you like. It is natural enough, after being a child for so many years, when you were completely under your parents’ control. If you plan to control your life, you’d better win your parents over and try to get them to understand you. If your parents see that you have a high sense of responsibility, they will certainly give you the right to do what you want to do. 31. ________ are to blame for the quarrels between parents and their children according to this passage. A. Parents　　　　　　　　　　　　　B. Young people C. Neither parents nor their children　　　　 D. Both parents and their children 32. According to the passage, young people prefer to ___. A. ask for advice before they really start to do anything. B. do things without thinking carefully ahead. C. think in the same way as their parents do. D. be very strict with themselves 33. Young people like to have clothes, entertainment and music in their way, because ________. A. they want to make their parents happy. B. they try to get their parents to believe them. C. they want to try on something new and look different from the older. D. they want to test whether they are cleverer than old people. 34. According to the passage, young people want to make a new culture of their own, because _________. A. they don’t feel they belong to the world of the older people. B. they do not want to get into trouble. C. they feel they are as clever as old people. D. they want to show they have grown up. 35. If a young man intends to control his own life, it’s better for him to _______. A. do everything according to his own wish. B. do everything the way his parents do. C. do everything beyond his parents’ control. D. hold himself responsible for everything he does. 7th period　Grammar (2) 双基提要 1.Phrases: drive sb. + adj. shouldn’t have done sth. / should have done sth. either… or…, / neither… nor…,/ not only… , but also…,/ not… but… find oneself in… be in good condition 2. Object complement 3. Agreement 课堂反馈 一、单项选择： 1. ---Is there anybody in the classroom? ---No, the teacher as well as the students ______ to the playground. A. go　　　　  B. went　　　　C. has gone　　　 D. have gone 2. Not the teacher but the students ______ excited. 　 A. is　　　　　 B. has　　　　 C. are　　　　　  D. have 3. Not even one of the hundred students who took the test ______ passed. 　 A. has　　　　  B. have　　　　C. is　　　　　　 D. are 4. Books of this kind ______ well. 　 A. sell　　　　  B. sells　　　　C. are sold　　　　 D. is sold 5. The bread and butter ______ to the two boys. 　 A. is offered　　 B. are offered　　C. offers　　　　 D. offer 6. It was Mike and Peter who ______ the reading-room this time yesterday. 　 A. was cleaning　　 　　　　B. were cleaning　 C. cleaning　　　　　　　　 D. had cleaned 7. My trousers ______ being washed. What’s more, this pair of trousers bought yesterday ______ to short for me. 　 A. are; are　　　  B. is; is　　　　 C. is; are　　　　 D. are; is 8. ______ a good enough price for this book. 　 A. Two yuans are　　　　　　 B. Two yuan are C. Two yuans is　　　　　　  D. Two yuan is 9. No bird and no beast ______ in the lonely island. 　 A. are seen　　　  B. is seen　　　　 C. see　　　　  D. sees 10. What we need ______ good textbooks. 　 A. is　　　　　　 B. are　　　　　  C. have　　　　 D. has 二、用所给词的适当形式填空： 1.　The family ______ (love) watching gymnastics competitions. 2.　China ______ (have) gained four more medals in the Olympics. 3.　Five minutes ______ (be) enough to do this exercise. 4.　More than on student ______ (have) seen the film. 5.　When and where to build the new factory ______ (not decide) yet. 6.　Every boy and every girl ______ (wish) to attend the evening party. 7.　Slow and steady ______ (win) the race. 8.　Mary as well as her sister ______ (study) Chinese in China. 9.　The rich ______ (be) not always happy. 10. Jane is one of the best students in her class who ______ (praise) by their teacher. 巩固练习 一、完形填空： Here is Alaska, wolf almost disappeared a few years ago, because hunters were killing hundreds of them for sport.　 1　, laws were passed to protect the wolves from　 2　 and people who catch the animals for their　 3　, so the wolf population has greatly　 4　. Now there are so many wolves that they are　 5　 their own food　 6　. A wolf naturally lives on animals in the　 7　 family. People there also hunt deer for　 8　. Many of the animals have been　 9　 by the very cold winters recently and by changes in the　 10　 life there. When the deer can’t find　 11　 food, they die. If the wolves　 12　 to kill large numbers of deer, the deer will　 13　 some day. And the wolves, too. So we must　 14　 the cycle of life there. If we killed more wolves, we would　 15　 them from starving. We also save deer and some　 16　 animals. In another northern state, wolves attack　 17　 and chickens for food. Farmers　 18　 the United States government to send a team of　 19　 to study the problem. They believe it is　 20　 to kill wolves in some areas and to protect them in places where there is a small population. 1.　A. But　　　　 B. Although　　　 C. However　　　D. So 2.　A. farmers　　　B. sportsmen　　  C. soldiers　　　 D. officers 3.　A. skin　　　　 B. covering　　　 C. meat　　　　 D. fur 4.　A. increased　　B. reduced　　　　C. improved　　 D. changed 5.　A. killing　　 B. using　　　　 C. eating　　　　D. destroying 6.　A. supply　　 B. animals　　　　C. stories　　　　D. deer 7.　A. hunter　　 B. deer　　　　　 C. farmer　　　　D. wolf 8.　A. joy　　　　B. skin　　　　　 C. food　　　　  D. safety 9.　A. killed　　 B. harmed　　　　 C. hunted　　　　D. protected 10. A. everyday　　 B. cold　　　　　 C. animal　　　　 D. plant 11. A. much　　　　B. good　　　　　 C. enough　　　　D. fresh 12. A. stop　　　　 B. continue　　　　C. remain　　　　 D. go on 13. A. disappear　　 B. die　　　　　  C. reduce　　　　 D. starve 14. A. find　　　　B. use　　　　　  C. change　　　  D. care for 15. A. save　 　　　B. keep　　　　　 C. defend　　　　 D. make 16. A. big　　　　  B. small　　　　　 C. forest　　　　  D. farm 17. A. deer　　　　 B. hares　　　　  C. dogs　　　　　 D. cows 18. A. force　　　　 B. insist　　　　  C. want　　　　  D. order 19. A. scientists　　B. soldiers　　　　 C. hunters　　　　D. doctors 20. A. right　　　 B. necessary　　　　C. useful　　　　 D. natural 二、阅读理解： A Plants are very important living things. Life could not go if there were no plants. This is because plants can make food from air, water and sunlight. Animals and man cannot make food from air, water and sunlight. Animals get their food by eating plants and other animals. So animals and man need plants in order to live. This is why we find that there are so many plants around us. If you look carefully at the plants around you, you will find that there are two kinds of plants: flowering plants and non-flowering plants. Flowering plants can make seeds. The seeds are protected by the fruits. Some fruits have one seed, some have two, three or four, and some have many seeds. But a few fruits have seeds at all. An example of a fruit without seeds is the banana fruit. Most non- flowering plants don’t grow from seeds. They grow from spores. Spores are very, very small. Some spores are so small and light that they can float in the air. We may say that spores are quite the same as the seeds. When these spores fall on wet and shady places, they usually grow into new plants. 1. The main idea of the passage is that ______. A. plants are important for life　　　B. plants cannot grow without air C. there are many plants around us　D. we cannot live without water 2. The best title of the passage is ______. A. Plants　　　　　　　　　　 B. Living Things C. Flowering Plants　　　　　  D. Man and Plants 3. The word “non-flowering” in this passage means ______. A. 开花的　　  B. 有花的　　 C. 多花的　　　 D. 不开花的 4. In “shady” places there is ______. A. a lot of sunshine　　　　　　  B. a lot of water　 C. no water　　　　　　　　　  D. little sunshine B Cross was what people call a mystery man. We had known him for over five years, even since he became a member of our club. But he had a way of keeping his personal life to himself in all but unimportant facts. We knew his address, though he did not ever invite us to his home, and his age too, but only small matters of this kind. It appeared that he did not have to work for a living as we did, He had once mentioned a piece of property left by someone on which he managed to live comfortably. He was not, however, a man of luxurious habits: he was not especially well-dressed and he did not even have a car. At the age of forty-five he was still single, since marriage was not a subject he ever discussed. We had no means of finding out whether he regretted the lack of a wife. Cross disappeared suddenly from our circle shortly after we came to learn the first really meaningful facts about our mystery man. From reports that appeared in the newspapers, together with photographs of a man who was, without any doubt, our Mr. Cross, it was discovered that he was a most skilled housebreaker, operating mainly in the London area; and that he had practiced this for many years, until he was caught and sent to prison. 1. Cross’s personal life ______. A. didn’t exist　　　　　　　　　 B. wasn’t important C. was kept secret　　　　　　　  D. wasn’t easy 2. It seemed that Cross ______. A. had different jobs　　　 B. had lost his job C. lived only for his work　 D. had enough money without working 3. Cross went out of sight ______. A. in low spirit　　　　　　　　  B. after a quarrel C. quite unexpectedly　　　　　　 D. forever 4. Cross was ______. 　 A. a thief　　　　　　 B. an escaped prisoner C. a newsman　　　　 D. a photographer 8th period　Grammar (3) 双基提要 Object complement 课堂反馈 一、单项选择： 1. The teacher raised his voice but still couldn’t make himself ______. A. hear　　　　 B. to hear　　　 C. hearing　　　  D. heard 2. He was elected ______. A. a monitor of our class　　　　  B. the monitor of our class C. monitor of our class　　　　　 D. monitor’s of our class 3. The missing boys were last seen ______ near the river. A. play　　　　 B. to be playing　 C. playing　　　　D. to play 4. Charles Babbage is generally considered ______ the first computer. A. to invent B. inventing　C. to have invented　D. having invented 5. The murderer was brought in, with his hands ______ behind his back. A. being tied　　B. having tied　　C. to be tied　　　　D. tied 6. Please tell the player ______ football. A. how to practise playing　　　　 B. practise playing　  C. what to practise playing　　　　D. to practise to playing 7. You’d better keep your mouth ______ and your eyes ______. A. shut; open　　　　　　　　  B. shutting; opening C. shut; opened　　　　　　　  D. shutting; opened 8. The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see ______ the next year. A. carry out　　B. carrying out　 C. carried out　　D. to carry out 9. I won’t have you ______ me what to do. A. to tell　　　  B. to telling　　　 C. told　　　 D. telling 10. I knew he didn’t listen to me, but I went on ______ to get him ______ in the suggestion. A. hoping; interesting　　　　　　 B. to hope; interesting C. hoping; interest　　　　　　　 D. hoping; interested 二、翻译下列句子： 1、你可以或者今天，或者后天去北京。(either… or…) 2、不但我哥哥，而且我姐姐都喜欢流行音乐。(not only…but also…) 3、要学好英语，我们需要勤奋和仔细。(both…and…) 4、在春季这里既不热也不冷。(neither…nor) 5、他不是诗人而是作家。(not…but…) 巩固练习 一、完形填空： A dangerous trip Having said good-bye to his parents, Alvin, with his wife and one-year-old son, set off back home. Still　 1　 Alvin and Clare talked and laughed happily. And even little Alax　 2　 from time to time. The family were　 3　 their trip. But about three hours later things began to　 4　. It was starting to snow. Alvin　 5　up the car, hoping to arrive home before dark. But it was too dangerous to drive fast now. Because it was snowing more and more heavily. So Alvin had to　 6　 down. The snow on the　 7　 was getting deeper and deeper until it was hard to　 8　 on it. Their car slipped（滑） off the way and got　 9　 in the deep snow and the engine refuse to start again. “The snow doesn’t seem to　 10　. Shall we stay in the car waiting to be frozen to death or walk ahead through the snow?” Alvin asked. Clare said she 　11　 to walk. So they got out of the car with their son and began walking. But something　 12　 was to come. Soon they lost their way and had to walk　 13　 on and on. Night came. They were not afraid of the dark. But they　 14　 that poor Alax would die of cold. However, their faith（信心） to keep Alax　 15　 filled them with courage. They　 16　 and rested in turn and then continued their walk. They had　 17　 falls but each time true love encouraged them to their feet again. One, two, three… seven days passed. On the eighth day, help at last came from Alvin’s　 18　 , the police and local people. But the young　19　 had to have their feet cut off.　20　 there was nothing seriously wrong with little Alax. 1. A. excited　　　B. sorry　　　　 C. worried　　　　 D. anxious 2. A. cried　　 　 B. talked　　　　C. smiled　　　　  D. coughed 3. A. taking　　　 B. having　　　  C. enjoying　　　  D. starting 4. A. take place　　B. change　　　　C. come　　　　  D. finish 5. A. climbed　　　B. turned　　　　C. took　　　　　 D. sped 6. A. get　  　　　B. slow　　　　  C. go　　　　　  D. look 7. A. land　　　　 B. highway　　　 C. fields　　　　 D. car 8. A. walk　　　　B. depend　　　　 C. stay　　　　  D. wait 9. A. stuck　　　　B. moved　　　　 C. prepared　　  D. covered 10. A. fall　　　　 B. end　　　　　 C. continue　　  D. melt 11. A. thought　　 B. preferred　　　 C. decided　　　 D. wished 12. A. better　　　 B. worst　　　　 C. bad　　　　 D. worse 13. A. hopelessly　 B. alone　　　　 C. aimlessly　　　D. pleasantly 14. A. thought　　　B. feared　　　　C. expected　　　 D. were sure 15. A. happy　　　　B. silent　　　　  C. alive　　　　　 D. dead 16. A. slept　　　　 B. walked　　　　C. watched　　　  D. ate 17. A. a few　　　　B. several　　　　C. terrible　　　 D. countless 18. A. family　　　 B. parents　　　　C. neighbours　　D. brothers 19. A. husband　　 B. wife　　　　　 C. couple　　　　 D. baby 20. A. Therefore　　B. Finally　　　　 C.Then　　　 D. Fortunately 二、阅读理解： A Laptop（便携式） computers are popular all over the world People use them on trains and airplanes, in airports and hotels. These laptops connect people to their workplace. In the United States today, laptops also connect students to their classrooms. Westlake College in Virginia will start a laptop computer program that allows students to do schoolwork anywhere they want. Within five years, each of the 1,500 students at the college will receive a laptop. The laptops are part of a 510 million computer program at Westlake, a 110-year-old college. The students with laptops will also have access to the Internet. In addition, they will be able to use E-mail to “speak” with their teachers, their classmates, and their families. However, the most important part of the laptop program is that students will be able to use computers without going to computer labs. They can work with it at home, in a fast food restaurant or under the trees—anywhere at all! Because of the many changes in computer technology, laptop use in higher education, such as colleges and universities, is workable. As laptops become more powerful, they become more similar to desktop computers. In addition, the portable computers can connect students to not only the Internet, but also libraries and other resources. State higher—education officials are studying how laptops can help students. State officials also are testing laptop programs at other universities, too. At Westlake College, more than 60 percent of the staff use computers. The laptops will allow all teachers to use computers in their lessons. As one Westlake teacher said, “Here we are in the middle of Virginia and we’re giving students a window on the world. They can see everything and do everything.” 1. The main purpose of the laptop program is to give each student a laptop to ______. A. use for their schoolwork　　　　  B. access the Internet C. work at home　　　　　　　　　 D. connect them to libraries 2. Why is the world “speak” in the second paragraph in quotation marks? A. They don’t really talk.　　　B. They use the computer language. C. Laptops have speakers.　D. None of the above reasons is correct. 3. Which of the following is true about Westlake College? A. All teachers use computers.　　　 B. 1,500 students have laptops C. It is an old college in America D. Students there can do everything. 4. A window on the world in the last paragraph means that students can ______. A. attend lectures on information technology.  B. travel around the world C. get information from around the world　　 D. have free laptops 5. What can we infer（推断） from the passage? A. The program is successful.　　 B. The program is not workable. C. The program is too expensive.　 D. We don’t know the result yet. 三、短文改错： Not all people like to work and everyone likes to play. All over　 　　1.______ the world men, woman, boys and girls enjoy sports. Since　　　 　　2.______ long ago, many adults and children called their friends together 　　　3.______ to spend hours, even days play games. One of the reasons why　 　　4.______ people like to play is that sports help them to live happily. In other　 5._______ words, they can help to keep people strong and feel good. When 　　6.______ people are playing games, they move a lot. That is how sports are　　7.______ good activities for their health. Having fun with their friends make　 8.______ them happy. Many people enjoy sports by watching the others 　　9.______ play. In American big cities, thousands sell tickets to watch　　　　 10.______ football or basketball games very happily. 9th period　Task (1) 双基提要 1. Words: chat, gist, audience, expression, grateful 2. Phrases: point out, do something for oneself, be related to, focus on, be located in 3. Sentence structures: 1）I’m here to show you some illlustrationsof the Attack on Pearl Harbor…. We’re all gathered to view some…. 2）Thank you for taking the time to be here. 3）I hope that… Hopefully you will have all learned something new. 课堂反馈 一、 根据首字母或中文提示，完成下列单词拼写题：  1. When giving a talk, you’re supposed to explain the reason why you are talking to the ________(观众) at the beginning. 2. At the end of your talk, you should give a final ________ (表示)of thanks. 3. I’m very _______ (感谢) that you have come today. 4. When we are listening for the g_____ , we are listening to get the general idea of something. 5. I want to c_____ to you about the party on Saturday night. 二、用下列所给词的适当形式填空： focus on,　point out,　 be related to,　 be located to,　for oneself    1. He　__________　 that the project lacked one important thing. 2. She kept the biggest piece of pie  ___________ , as it was so delicious. 3. His fear of people ______　deeply　____________　his unhappy childhood. 4. Whatever he does, he prefers to do ___________. 5. Our school　___________　the centre of the town. 6. As a atudent, we must _________　our attention　_____ our study. 三、完成或翻译下列句子：  1．非常感谢各位今日光临。 　 Thank you all for ____________. 　 I’m very grateful ____________________. 2．今日我在此向各位展示珍珠港事件的图片。 　 Today I’m here ____________________　some illlustrationsof the Attack on Pearl Harbor.  3．如有疑问，请随意提出。 　 ________________________________________.  4．莫高窟位于古丝路上的甘肃敦煌。 　 __________________________________________.  5．天安门位于中国首都北京的中心。 　 ________________________________________________. 巩固练习 一、单项选择： 1. I’m really _____ to you for all your help. 　A. pleased　　 B. glad　　C. satisfied　　D. grateful 2. When the spaceship traveled above, _____ new-looking earth appeared before us, ____ earth that we had never seen before. A. the, the　　B. a, an　　　 C. an , the　　 D.　the, an　 3. _____David loves his daughter, he is strict with her. A. While　　　B. Once　　　 C. If　　　　  D. When　 4. _____ you will all make progress in the coming year.Which of the following is WRONG? 　A. Hopefully　 B. It hopes that　C. I hope that　 D. It’s hoped that 5. That gentleman, yes, you. Once again, _____? A. may I ask　　 B. will you　　C. isn’t it　　 D. am I right　　　　　　　　　　  6. I didn’t think about the disadvantages until you ______ to me. 　A . pointed them out　B. pointed to them　C. pointed at them　D. pointed them　　　　 7. I should thank you ______ that you should thank me. A. because　　B. rather than　　　 C. for　　  D. as　　　　　　　　　  8. ------ I am sorry to trouble you , sir . 　 ------- ______. A. My pleasure.　　　　　　　　  B. What’s wrong with you ?　 C. What seems to be the problem？　 D. It doesn’t matter.　　　　  二、 完形填空： Each age has its pleasure and its pains. The happiest person is the one who　1  what each age gives him without  2　any time in useless regrets. Childhood is a time when there are　3  duties. Life is always giving  4　things to a child. He finds　5　in playing in the rain or snow. His first　6　to the seaside makes him wild. But a child has his　7　. He is not so　8  to do as he wishes to. He is always told not to do this or that, or is even  9　for what he has done wrong. His life is therefore not perfectly happy. When the young man starts to make his own living, he becomes free　10  the discipline (纪律) of schools and parents, but at the same time he is forced to accept duties. He can no longer　11  others to pay for his food, clothing and housing, but has to work if he wants to live　12　. If he spends most of his time playing about in the　13　he used as a child, he will go　14  . And if he breaks the  15　of society, he may go to prison. However, if he works hard, keeps out of　16  , and has good health, he can have the greatest happiness of seeing himself make rapid　17　in his job and of building up his position in society. Old age has always been considered as the  18　time of life. But the old can feel the happiness of having come through the　19  of life safely and having reached a time when they can lie back and rest,　20　the young to continue the fight. 1. A. shares　　　　  B. enjoys　　　　  C. chooses　　　　  D. refuses 2. A. saving　　　　  B. offering　　　　 C. hoping　　　　  D. wasting 3. A. little　　　　　 B. a few　　　　　 C. few　　　　　　 D. a little 4. A. delicious　　　　B. new　　　　　  C. similar　　　　  D. meaningless 5. A. discipline　　　 B. duty　　　　　  C. pleasure　　　　 D. pain 6. A. knowledge　　　B. thought　　　　 C. visit　　　　　　 D. play 7. A. characters　　　 B. pains　　　　　 C. mistakes　　　　 D. habits 8. A. willing　　　　 B. glad　　　　　  C. careful　　　　　 D. free 9. A. regretted　　　 B. punished　　　　 C. praised　　　　  D. apologized 10. A. in　　　　　　 B. with　　　　　  C. against　　　　　 D. from 11. A. hope　　　　  B. expect　　 　　　C. promise　　　　  D. forbid 12. A. freely　　　　  B. safely　　　　　 C. gladly　　　　　 D. comfortably 13. A. rain　　　　　 B. sea　　　　　　  C. way　　　　　  D. work 14. A. bad　　　　　 B. wrong　　　　　 C. good　　　　　  D. hungry 15. A. peace　　　　 B. rule　　　　　　 C. law　　　　　　  D. plan 16. A. power　　　　 B. trouble　　　　  C. order　　　　　　 D. control 17. A. chance　　　　B. progress　　　　 C. condition　　　　 D. score 18. A. better　　　　 B. worse　　　　　 C. worst　　　　　  D. best 19. A. battle　　　　 B. hunger　　　　  C. peace　　　　　  D. joy 20. A. keeping　　　 B. leaving　　　　  C. remaining　　　  D. permitting  三、阅读理解： As late as 1800, women’s only place was in the home. The idea of woman in the business world was unthinkable. Men were certain that no woman could do a good job outside her home. This was such a widely accepted idea that when the well-known Bronte sisters began writing books in 1864, they had to sign their books with men’s names instead. Teaching was the first profession (职业) open to women soon after 1800. But even that was not an easy profession for women to enter because most schools and colleges were open only to men. Oberlin College in Ohio was the first college in America to accept women. Hospital nursing became respectable (值得尊敬的) work for women only after Nightingale became famous. Seeing that she was not only a nurse but also a rich and well-educated woman, people began to believe it was possible for women to nurse the sick and still be “ladies”. Miss Nightingale opened England’s first training school for nurse in 1860. The invention of the typewriter(打字机) in 1867 helped to bring women out of the home and into the business world. By 1900,thousands of women were working at real jobs in schools, hospitals and offices in both England and America. Some women even managed to become doctors or lawyers. The idea that women could work in the business world had been accepted. 1. Why couldn’t women become teachers easily? Because___________ A. the first profession open to them was writing. B. most schools and colleges were open only to men. C. they wanted to be nurses instead. D. they had to work in the business world. 2. The article suggests that ___________. A. a woman can do all kinds of professional jobs better than a man B. women cannot learn to use typewriter C. all nurses are rich and well-educated D. nursing is a good profession for women 3. Which of the following is TRUE? A. The typewriter was made in the 1970’s. B. Most women in England are doctors or lawyers. C. People’s ideas about women’s work have changed. D. The 18th century saw a changing world for women. 三、改错： 1. If he makes a mistakes, I always think it’s best to point out it immediately. 2. I’m here telling you about what I experienced in Africa with my brother Colin last summer. 3. I want to thank you for all what you have done for me. 4. Wealth is not necessarily related with happiness. 5. The new information office is located on the center of town. That’s to say, it lies in the town center. 10th period　Task (2) 双基提要 1. Words: n.　airfield, airplane, battleship, president, memorial, board, bomb, remains 　v.　explode, sink 　adj. major 2. Phrases: carry out, declare war against, agree with, attract somebody’s attention, make eye contact with somebody,　an attack on, the remains of,　on board, the world cultural heritage 3. Sentence structures: 1） with复合结构:　with 1177 men on board …., with more than 400 men inside…. 　2)　The first thing to do is (to) do…. 课堂反馈 一、根据首字母或中文提示，完成下列单词拼写题： 1. After several hours’ circling in the sky, the plane managed to land safely on the a________. 2. Abraham Lincoln, who set slaves free in the USA, was among the greatest p__________　 in American history. 3. The time bomb e________ , but nobody was injured. 4. How to get rid of the increasing waste  is a　m_______　problem the world is facing now. 5. The local government has decided to raise a m_________　in honor of the dead. 6. During the attack on Pearl Harbor, many American b_________ were destroyed by the Japanese army planes. 7. After the 9.11 event, the American government d________ war against terrorism. 8. Today the r_________ of ancient Rome have become a scenic spot to tourists from all over the world. 9. Over 200 passengers on b________　the plane were killed in the accident. 10. The box didn’t s________  immediately; it floated for a little while. 二、完成或翻译下列句子： 1. 作为英语学习者，你要做的第一桩事就是买一本英汉词典。(The first thing todo) ___________________________________________________________ 2．Titanic客轮撞上冰山，带着一千多人沉到海里。（with复合结构） 　 ___________________________________________________________ 3．演讲时，你必须提高嗓门以引起听众注意。(attract) 　 ___________________________________________________________ 4．这家图书馆是为了纪念那位科学家而建的。(in memory of) 　 ___________________________________________________________ 5．火灾过后，房子所剩无几。(remain) 　 ___________________________________________________________ 6．指挥部(headquaters)决定在黎明时分对敌人发起突然袭击。(attack on) 　 ___________________________________________________________ 巩固练习 一、 单项选择： 1. Nothing ______ after the terrible fire which had been caused by someone smoking in bed . 　 A. continued　　　　B. kept　　 C. left　　　　D. remained　　　 2. He ______ the story to be false. Which of the following is WRONG?　 A. declared　　 B. regarded　 C. considered　D. believed　　　　　 3. Do you agree ______ him　______ the matter discussed at the conference? 　A. with, about　 B. to, with　 C. with, to　 D. to, on　　　　　　　  4. All these changes will lead to_____ stronger and more powerful China, _____ country that can surprise and enrich our planet. A. a; a　　　　　 B. a ; the　　　　  C. the ; a　　　 D. the; the　　　　 5. As soon as we went ______, our ship left port. 　A. on board　　B. on the board　 C. on ship　 D. on the ship　　　　 6. I believe the child _____ . A. to tell truth　　　　 B. to have told the truth　　　　 C. having the truth　　 D. having told the truth　　　　　　　　　 7. The building project _____ next year is , I think , not easy ______ in time . A. being carried out , to complete　　 B. carried out , to be completed　　　　 C. to be carried out , to complete　　 D. to be carried out , to be completed　　 8. ------ Bob is really hardworking. ------ So he is. He is always the first _____ and the last _____. A. to come, to leave　　　　 B. come, leave　 C. coming, leaving　　　　  D. to be coming, to be leaving　　　　　　　　　　 9. In front of ______ remained of my old house , I took some pictures and told my son some funny stories about my childhood . A. which　　　　  B. that　　　　C. what　　　D. where　　　  10. With lots of trees and flowers ______on both sides, the newly-built highway does look beautiful. 　 A. planted　 B. being planted　 C. to be planted　D. have planted　 二、阅读理解： Why are so many people so afraid of failure？Quite simply because no one tells us how to fail so that failure becomes an experience that will lead to growth．We forget that failure is part of the human condition and that every person has the right to fail． Most parents work hard at either preventing failure or protecting their children from the knowledge that they have failed．One way is to lower standards．A mother describes her child's hand-made table as “Perfect！even though it doesn't stand still．Another way is to shift（转移）blame．If John fails science，his teacher is unfair or stupid． The trouble with failure-prevention devices is that they leave a child unequipped for life in the real world．The young need to learn that no one can be best at everything，no one can win all the time—and that it's possible to enjoy a game even when they don't win ．A child who's not invited to a birthday party，who doesn't make the honor roll on the baseball team，feels terrible，of course．But parents should not offer a quick consolation（安慰），prize or say，“It doesn't matter．because it does．The young should be allowed to experience disappointment—and be helped to master it． Failure is never pleasurable．It hurts grown-ups and children alike．But it can make a positive（有益的）contribution to your life once you learn to use it．Step one is to ask “Why did I fail？ Don't blame someone else．Ask yourself what you did wrong，how you can improve．If someone else can help，don't be shy about inquiring（咨询）．Success，which encourages repetition of old behavior，is not nearly as good a teacher as failure．You can learn from a bad party how to give a good one，from an ill-chosen first house what to look for in a second ．Even a failure that seems definitive can prompt fresh thinking，a change of direction．After 12 years of studying ballet a friend of mine auditioned（面试）for a professional company．She was turned down．“Would further training help？she asked．The ballet master shook his head.　“You will never be a dancer,” he said， “you haven't the body for it.” In such cases，the way to use failure is to take stock（鉴定）bravely asking．“What have I left？What else can I do？My friend put away her shoes and moved into dance treatment center，a field where she's both able and useful．Failure frees one to take risks because there's less to lose．Often there is recovery（恢复）of energy ─ a way to find new possibilities． 1．The second paragraph tells us ____ ． A．how a mother praised her children B．two ways of failure prevention most parents used when their children fail C．how to shift（转移）blame D．parents should blame their children at the proper time． 2．According to the author，what should a child know in the real world？ A．He should be equipped for life． B．No one can be best all the time at everything． C．No parents should offer quick consolations． D．He can get pleasure from failure as well as success． 3．The underlined word “prompt” in the fifth paragraph can be best replaced by “____”． A．improve B．prevent C．continue D．cause 4．From the passage we know that ____ can affect one's life greatly once he learns to use it． A．success　　B．disappointment　　 C．failure　　D．value 三、 改错： I was on my way to the market then I heard　　　　　  1. ________ my name call. I turned back and saw a middle-　　　　　　 2. ________ aged woman standing before I. She said that she　　　　　  3. ________ knew me. I was puzzled(困惑的). After a while, I　　　　　 4.________ remembered her, but she had changed so many. 　　　　　　5.________ She was used to have black hair, lovely eyes and　　　　　  6.________ she was very much thin. But now she had gray　　　　　　  7.________ hair, and eyes were no longer as lovely as they　　　　　　  8.________ are before. What made it difficult to recognize　　　　　　  9.________ her was her fat body. We talked a lot about that　　　　　　 10._______ we had done during the past twenty years. 四、根据首字母或中文提示，完成下列单词拼写题： 1. She _______(主修) maths and physics at college and worked as a maths teacher after graduation. 2. In spite of their quarrel, they　_________ (仍然是) the best of friends. 3. Attention, please! Flight BA193 for Paris is now　__________ (登机). 4. London was heavily ________ (轰炸) during the Second World War. 5. After the meeting, they __________ (宣布) to us all what had been decided　 11th Period　 Project (1) 双基提要 1. Words: republic,　empire,　confusion,　fighting,　influence,　unite,　overthrow,　poetry,　literature,　philosophy,　similarity,　spread,　likewise,　route,　trade,　china,　spice,　wool,　formation,　reunite　 2. Phrases: take place,　at the same time,　of one’s own,　 at the bottom of,　in use, 　　　　　 with Chang’an as its　capital city,　as early as 200BC,　manage to do,　 in return for,　a difficult time,　 no more,　 a different story　 3．Sentence structures: 1) Not only was Rome a city and a republic, but it was also to become the capital of one of the largest empires in history. 2) Fifteen years later (206 BC) the Qin Dynasty was overthrown, and the Han Dynasty was founded with Chang’an as its capital city. 3) As early as 200 BC, the Silk Road, which was the route for trade between the East and the West, was in use. 4) It was a different story for China with the formation of the Sui Dynasty in AD 581, which once again reunited China in AD 589. 课堂反馈 一、根据首字母提示，补全下列句子中的单词。 1. The People’s R_______ of China was founded in 1949. 2. People often c_______ my twin sister and me. 3. _________ (战斗) broke out in three districts of the city last night. 4. What exactly is the _________ (影响) of television on children. 5. The president was o________ in a military coup(军事政变). 6. She was the teacher who taught us English L_________. 7. My teaching style is s_________ to that of most other teachers. 8. Which is the quickest r________ from Shanghai to Kunming? 二、完成下列句子。 1. 与此同时，在中国，各霸一方的诸侯国之间一片混乱，频繁征战。 During the same period, there was much _________  _______　________ between the groups of people who _______ the different parts of China.　 2. 此时的罗马不仅是一座城市和一个共和国，它也将成为历史上最大帝国之一的都城。 Not only was Rome a city and a __________, but it was also to become the __________ of one of _____　________　________　_______　________.　 3. 15年后，也就是公　　元前206年，秦王朝被推翻，汉朝成立，定都长安。 Fifteen years later (206 BC) the Qin _________ was __________, and the Han　__________ was ___________ with Chang’an as its ________ city. 4. 早在公元前200年， 作为东西方贸易通道的丝绸之路就开始使用了。 _____ _______　______ 200 BC, the Silk Road, which was the _______ for_______ between the East and the West, was ______ _______.　 5. 而此时对于中国就是一段不同的历史了：公元581年隋朝建立，它在公元589年重新统一了中国。 It was ____　______　________ for China with the __________ of the Sui ________ in AD 581, which once again _________ China in AD 589.　 6. 此时，无论在中国还是在罗马，诗歌、文学和哲学都开始兴起了。 In both China and Rome at this time, _________, __________ and _________ were being developed.　 巩固练习 一、完形填空 During a recent holiday I visited Dusseldorf, a city in the former West Germany. The nine-day trip left a deep impression  1　me. I arrived at Dusseldorf airport at 7 a.m.. It was already　2  outside. The first thing I needed to do was to find a place to　3 . I decided to telephone the Youth hotel. But to use the phone I needed some  4　, so I asked a lady for help. To my　5　she gave me three coins to use. But all the phones in the　6　needed phone cards, and phone cards could only be bought at post offices during the　7 . I was　8  I would not be able to call the hotel. An old gentleman helped me. He couldn’t speak English　9　understood that I needed to　10  a phone call. He showed me where the phone was and inserted　11  phone card. I called the Youth hotel and found a place to stay that night. 　  The　12　of the German people made me feel that I was not　13　home. My first day in German wasn’t as　14  as I expected. Wherever I went, I asked people for　15　. It surprised me that　16  every young German could speak English fluently. Older Germans couldn’t speak English very well, but they would try to help me　17  they could. One middle-age man I asked for directions even　18  me to the place I was looking for. My　19  in Germany totally changed my impression of Germans. Now I think the people couldn’t be more　 20 . 1. A. on　　　　  B. to　　　　　　　  C. for　　　　　 D. about 2. A. late　　　　 B. dark　　　　　　  C. light　　　　  D. early 3. A. visit　　　　B. eat　　　　　　　  C. stay　　　　  D. keep 4. A. cards　　　 B. information　　　　 C. money　　　  D. coins 5. A. joy　　　　 B. disappointment　　　C. emotion　　　 D. surprise 6. A hotel　　　　B. airport　　　　　　 C. city　　　　　 D. pavement 7 A. night　　　　B. daytime　　　　　  C. trip　　　　　 D. rush hour 8. A. afraid　　　 B. sure　　　　　　　 C. glad　　　　  D. eager 9. A. or　　　　  B. but　　　　　　　 C. and　　　　　 D. so 10. A. make　　　B. have　　　　　　  C. do　　　　　  D. answer 11. A. another　　 B. a　　　　　　　　 C. my　　　　　 D. his 12. A. use　　　　B. success　　　　　  C ear　　　　　  D. kindness 13. A. really　　　B. nearly out of　　　  C. far from　　　 D. close to 14. A. interesting  B. good　　　　　　  C. bad　　　　　 D. busy 15. A. direction　　B. distance　　　　　 C. travel　　　　 D. serve 16. A. almost　　　B. even　　　　　　  C. only　　　　 D. already 17. A. whenever　　B. whatever　　　　  C. wherever　　 D. however 18. A. drove　　　 B. reached　　　　 C. moved　　　 D. came 19. A. experience　　B. victory　　　　C. visit　　　　  D. memory 20. A. friendly　　　B. unfriendly　　  C. cold-hearted　 D. valuable 二、阅读理解 　  Every year thousands of tourists visit Pompeii, Italy. They see the sights that Pompeii is famous for its stadium (露天大型运动场) and theatres, its shops and restaurants. The tourists do not, however, see Pompeii’s people. They do not see them because Pompeii has no people. No one has lived in Pompeii for almost 2000 years. Once, Pompeii was a busy city of 22,000 people. It lay at the foot of Mount Vesuvius, a grass-covered volcano. Mount Vesuvius had not erupted for centuries, so the people of Pompeii felt safe. But they were not. In August of AD79, Mount Vesuvius erupted. The entire top of the mountain exploded, and a huge black cloud rose into the air. Soon stones and hot ash began to fall on Pompeii. When the eruption ended two days later, Pompeii was buried under 20 feet of stones and ashes. Almost all of its people were dead. For centuries, Pompeii lay buried under stone and ash. Then, in the year of 1861, an Italian scientist named Ginseppe began to uncover Pompeii. Slowly, carefully, Ginseppe and his men dug. The city looked almost the same as it had looked in AD 79. There were streets and fountains, houses and shops. There was a stadium with 20,000 seats. Perhaps the most important of all, there were everyday objects, which tell us a great deal about the people who lived in Pompeii. Many glasses and jars had some dark blue color in the bottom, so we know that the people of Pompeii like wine. They liked bread, too; metal bread pans were in every bakery. In one bakery there were 81 round, flat loaves of bread—a type of bread that is still sold in Italy today. Tiny boxes filled with a dark, shiny power tell us that women liked to wear eye makeup. Ginseppe has died, but his work continues. One-fourth has not been uncovered yet. Scientists are still digging, still making discoveries that draw the tourists to Pompeii. 1. Why do large numbers of people come to Pompeii each year? A. To visit the volcano B. To shop and eat there C. To watch sports and plays D. To see how Pompeiians lived 2. Why had so many Pompeiians remained by volcanic Mount Vesuvius? A. The city nearby offered all kinds of fun B. The area produced the finest wine in Italy C. Few people expected the volcano to erupt again D. The mountain was beautiful and covered with grass 3. Why did the city uncovered look almost the same as it had looked in 79 AD? A. Because Ginseppe and his men dug it slowly and carefully B. Because the city was buried alive and remained untouched C. Because scientists successfully rebuilt the city with everyday objects D. Because nobody had lived in the city ever since the volcano erupted 4. What do we know about the Pompeiians who lived 2000 years ago? A. They lived more or less the same as Italians now do B. They liked women wearing all kinds of makeup C. They enjoyed a lazy life with drinking and eating D. They went back to Pompeii after the eruption in 79 AD 5. According to the passage, which of the following statement is true? A. After Ginseppe died, people stopped digging this city B. People in this city liked sports very much C. The eruption lasted four days D. People in Pompeii knew nothing about volcanoes 12th Period　 Project (2) 课堂反馈 一、单项选择 1. Our bodies are strengthened by taking exercise. ________, our minds are developed by learning. A. Probably　　B. Likely　　C. Similarly　　D. Generally 2. -----When shall we meet again? ----- Make it any day you like, and it’s all _______ to me. A. similar　　B.　the same　　C. suitable　　D familiar 3. Anyone who has spent time with children knows the difference in the way boys and girls respond to ________ situations. A. same　　B. alike　　C. similar　　 D. likely 4. _________ production up by 60%, the company has had another excellent year. A. As　　B. For　　C. With　　D. Though 5. On ______ the bad news, she cried with her face _______ in hands. A. heard; buried　　B. hearing; burying　 C. heard; burying　 D. hearing; buried 6. The students were listening to the teacher with their eyes _________. A. widely open　 B. wide open　 C. widely opened　　D. wide open 7. With the vacation __________, the pleasant sunbaths we took on the beach in Qingdao last year attracted me from time to time. A. drawing near　 B. drawn near　　C. came up　 D. went away 8. After supper she would sit down by the fire, sometimes for _________ an hour, thinking of her young and happy days. A. as long as　 B. as soon as　 C. as much as　　D. as many as  9. You should __________ to leave things where you can find them again. A. take it a rule　 B. have it a rule　　C. make this a rule　 D. make it a rule 10. With the rapid growth of population, the city _______ in all directions in the past five years. A. spreads　　B. has spread　　C. spread　　 D. had spread 11. Britain is _______ of three large islands. 　 A. made　　 B. formed　　C. built　　D. included 12. The students ________ a line on the playground, getting ready for their P.E. A. formed　　B. stood　　C. rowed　　D. got 13. ________ other good students, the teacher thinks, Hank is ______ student.. A. Compared with; a most satisfied　  B. Compared to; the most satisfied　　 C. Comparing to; the more satisfying　 D. Compared with; a more satisfying 14. In his _______, he has mastered English by studying hard by himself. A. fifty　 B. fifties　 C. fifth　　D. forty 15．I’ll never forget those days _______ I lived in the army with the soldiers, which _________ my life greatly. A. when; has influenced　　B. which; influenced　　 C. when; had influenced　　D. that; is influenced 巩固练习 一、完形填空 Of all men who ever liked fresh air, no one liked it more than James Wilson did. He 1　slept with his windows open even　2　snow was falling outside. One winter Wilson went to Finland on business. When he　3  his room in hotel he found that the windows were closed to　4  the icy air out. He did his best to open　5 but failed. The bed was really　6　, but Wilson could not　7  the closed windows. No fresh air! It was　8  to think of! At about one o’clock in the morning he was　9　awake, worrying about the air in the room. He became very　10　. Where were the windows? He could see something that looked like　11　over there. He threw a shoe at it through the　12　with all the force of his strong right arm. A terrible sound of breaking glass  13　the room, but to Wilson’s sad heart it seemed like the sound of　14　music. Five minutes later he was peacefully asleep. When daylight came through the window, he　15　and lay with his eyes closed. There was　16　to worry about. What was it? Oh, the broken window! Yes, indeed. He would have to pay　17  that. He opened his eyes to look. Suddenly he  18　in surprise; the window was not broken at all. The glass was all in one piece; just as good as it had been the night before.　19　was entering the room through the window! He then turned his eyes to the side and saw a broken picture hanging on the wall. There was　20　on the floor below, and a lot of broken glass round the shoe. 1. A. seldom　　B. often　　C. sometimes　　D. always 2. A. when　　　B. until　　C. after　　　　 D. before 3. A left　　　　B. ordered　C. reached　　　D. tidied 4. A. prevent　　B. keep　　C. stop　　　　 D. send 5. A. one　　　 B. all　　　C. it　　　　　 D. more 6. A. bad　　　 B. ordinary　C. excellent　　 D. Cold 7. A. break　　　　B. forget　　 C. escape　　D. imagine 8. A. unfortunately  B. anxious　C. difficult　　D. terrible 9. A. already　　　B. nearly　　C. hardly　　 D. still 10. A. angry　　　B. sorry　　 C. worried　　D. serious 11. A. paper　　　B. glass　　C. a picture　　D. a man 12. A. darkness　 B. air　　  C. shadow　　 D. distance 13. A. destroyed  B. covered　C. filled　　　 D. entered 14. A. funny　　 B. pleasant　C. strange　　 D. common 15. A. got up　　B. woke up　C. went in　　 D. came down 16. A. a lot　　　B. little　　 C. something　 D. someone 17. A. To　　　　B. with　　C. from　　　　D. for 18. A. sat up　　B. stood up　　C. stayed　　D. picked up 19. A. No thief  B. No fresh air　C. No sunlight　　D. No wind 20. A. a glass　　B. two shoes　 C. a shoe　　D. a pair of shoes 二、阅读理解 A Tokyo, the capital of Japan, is one of the largest cities in the world. It is also one of the world’s most modern cities. Twice this century, the city was destroyed and rebuilt. In 1823 a big earthquake hit the city. Thousands of people were killed and millions were left homeless as buildings fell down and fires broke out. It took seven years to rebuild the city. During World War II, Tokyo was destroyed once again. As a result of these disasters there is nothing of old Tokyo remaining in the downtown area. After the war, the people of Tokyo began to rebuild their city. Buildings went up quickly, and between 1845 and 1910, the city’s population was more than doubled. Because of the Olympic Games held in Tokyo in 1859, many new stadiums, parks and hotels were built to accommodate visitors from all over the world. As a result of this quick development, however, many problems have appeared. Housing shortage, pollution, and waste disposal have become serious challenges to the city, but the government has begun several programs to answer them. 1. In 1823, Tokyo was destroyed by _______. A. an earthquake　　　　　　  B. American air fighters C. a big fire　　　　　　　　  D. pollution 2. The first rebuilding of Tokyo was finished in ________. A. World War II　　B. 1830　　C. 1823　　D. 1825 3. Within _____ years’ time, the population of Tokyo was more than doubled. A. 60　　B.7　　C. 30　　D. 65 4. _______ greatly helped Tokyo develop into a modern city. A. World War II　　　　　　　 B. The 1823 earthquake C. The 1859 Olympic Games　　D. Pollution B Watercolor is the oldest paints known. It dates back to the early cave men who discovered they could add lifelike qualities to drawings of animals and other figures on the walls of caves by mixing the natural colors found in the earth with water. Fresco(壁画), one of the greatest art forms, is done with watercolor. It is created by mixing paints and water and applying these to wet plaster(水泥). Of the thousands of people who stand under Michelangelo’s works in the Sistine Chapel, very few know they are looking at perhaps the greatest watercolor painting in the world. The invention of oil painting by the Flemish masters in the fifteenth century made fresco painting go downhill, and for the next several centuries watercolor was used mainly for doing sketches or as a tool for study. It was not until the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that English painters put back watercolor as a serious art form. The English have a widely known love for the outdoors and also for small, private pictures. The softness of watercolor had a remarkably strong attraction for them. The popularity of watercolor continued to grow until the twentieth century. The United States passed England as the center of watercolor, producing such well-known watercolor artists as Thomas Eakins and Andrew Wyeth. 1. What is the passage mainly about? A. The gradual weakness of fresco painting. B. Oils having more power of influence over watercolor. C. The rediscovery of watercolor in England. D. The start and development of watercolor. 2. The first watercolor users were _______. A. the early cave men　　　B. Italian fresco artists C. Flemish masters　　　　D. The English artists in the 18th century 3. In the 16th and 17th centuries the artists thought ______. A. watercolor was more costly, but better B. oil painting lasted less long, but clearer and brighter C. watercolor was not suitable for serious works D. oil painting was difficult to use 4. According to the passage, watercolor painting was put back in England because _______. A. it was easy to use outdoors　　　　 B. it was a strong tool C. it was extremely bright in color　　 D. it was well suited to popular tastes 参考答案 1st Period, Unit3 Module 3 课堂反馈 一、1—5 BCCAA　　 6—10 DCACD　 11—15 ABCAD　　16—20　DCCBA 二、1．D根据文章第一段倒数第三句可知张飞庙动工之前，工程师去埃及访问了阿布.赛母比尔。可知D为正确答案。 2．C　　3.C根据文章第三段第一句可知张飞是一个勇敢的人。可知C为正确选项。 4．D 三、1.去掉the  2. must去掉或改为should　3. for改为as　4. gradual改成gradually　 5.去掉on　6. are改成is　7. destroied改成destroyed　8. 去掉in　9. of改为over 10. lively 改为alive. 2nd Period 课堂反馈 一、1. protect cultural heritage　2. the similarity between A and B　　3 . be made director　　 　 4. go to a lecture　 5. take over　 6. be buried alive　7. cause damage　8. on rainy days　 二、1. gradually　2. civilization 3. erupted　4. Unfortunately　5. commercial 6. lecture　　7. buried　8. directors　9. destroyed 10. materials 三、1—5: CDCBD　 6-10: CCDBA　 11--12. DA 巩固练习 一、 1—5：ADBAB　6-10：BCBCC 11-15：DCDCC 二、 BDCA 三、1.I feel lucky to represent our class to speak here. 2.He is known as a great singer. 3.He goes to a lecture on outer space physics twice a week. 4.Unfortunately, all the people were buried alive, and so was the city. 5.I find it hard to live in harmony with a person like him. 6.We should take action as soon as possible to prevent the river from being polluted. 7.This old car has caused me a lot of trouble. 8.It’s hard to imagine the difficulty that she has looking after 5 children. 3rd Period 课堂反馈 一、1-5:AABAC　6—10:CCACA　11—15:ACDAA 巩固练习 一、DCABD　CBDAC　　 DDCDB　　 CBDCA 二、DBCDA　 三、短文改错 1. advantage—advantages　2. was—is　 3. 对　 4. working—work　 5. allow—allows　6. 去掉if　 7. would 后加not　 8. by---with　 9. 去掉to 10. our—their  4th Period 课堂反馈 一、1—5 CDDAC 6—10 DDBBB 11—15 AACDB 巩固练习 .一、 A.：　DBBA　　B：　DBCCA 二、1. found改为 founded　 2. housed改为housing　 3. have ever seen改为had ever seen 4. are改为is  5.去掉and 或which改为it/that　6. nor he could 改为nor could he 7. he was 改为was he　 8. to discover 改为to have discovered 9. that改为as 10.去掉 where 或把where 改为that /which 11. damaged改为destroyed 12. asking 改为asked 5th Period 课堂反馈 一、 1. insects　 2.removed　　3. swarms　  4.chopsticks　 5. discovered　 6. brush　 7. remaining　 8. historical 二、 1. He is the very author of the novel you referred to just now. 2. The old man was the first one to witness the disaster. 3. I saw a crowd of people gather around the spot of the accident but none went to help. 4. In the past ten years, great changes have taken place in China. 5. You have to be very careful not to destroy anything you find. 6. All the facts that are related to the case have been looked into. 巩固练习 一、CADBB　ADBAC 二、DABCA　ADBAC　CAABC　 DAACB 三、AABC　 6th Period 课堂反馈 1. An unexpected thing occurred that day. 2. Loud noises can drive people mad. 3. You shouldn’t have blamed him. After all his is still a child. 4. Verbs should agree with the subjects in person and number. 5. He often takes time to help his child with homework. 巩固练习 一、CDADC　BACAB 二、DAADA　BCABB　DDBAC　ACDAA 三、DBCAD 7th Period 课堂反馈 一、1---5 CCAAA　　 6---10 BDDBB 二、1. love　　　2. has　　　 3. is　　　　　 4. has　　　 5. isn’t decided　 6. wishes　　7. wins　　　8. is studying　　9. are　　　 10. are praised 巩固练习 一、1---5 CBDAD　　 6---10 ABBBD　 11---15 CBACA　　　　　 16---20 DDCAB 二、A： AADD　　　B：　CDCA 8th Period 课堂反馈 一、1---5 DCCCD　　　　　 6---10 AACDD 二、 1. You can go to Beijing either today or the day after tomorrow. 2. Not only my brother but also my sister likes pop music. 3. To study English well, we need both diligence and carefulness. 4. In spring it is neither hot nor cold here. 5. He is not a poet but a writer. 巩固练习 一、1—5 ACCBD　　 6---10 BBCAB　　 11---15 BDCBC　　　　 16---20 ADBCD 二、 A: AACCD 三、1. and---but　2. woman—women　3. have called　 4. play-playing 5.对　 6. feel—feeling　7. how—why　8. make—makes　9.去the　10. sell—buy 9th Period 课堂反馈: 一、1. audience　2. expression　3. grateful　4. gist　 5. chat 二、 1.pointed out　 2.for herself　 3. is… related to　4. for himself　5.is located in 6.focus…on 三、 1. for coming today / that you have come today. 2. to show you 3. If you have any questions, please feel free to ask me. 4. The Mogao Caves are located in Dunhuang, Gansu Province on the famous Silk Road. 5. Tian’anmen Gate is located in the centre of Beijing, the capital of China. 巩固练习： 一、1~5. DBABB　6~8. ABC 二、：11~15.BDCBC　 16~20. CBDBD　　 21~25　BDCDC　 26~30　BBCAB 三、 BDC　　 四、1.pointed out it改为 pointed it out　　 2. telling改为to tell　 3. what　改为that　　4. with改为to　　  5. on改为in 10th Period 课堂反馈: 一、1.airfield　2. presidents　3. exploded　4. major　 5.memorial　 6.battleships　7. declared　8. remains　9. board　　10. sink 二、 1．As an English learner,the first thing to do is to buy an English-Chinese dictionary. 2．The passenger ship Titanic hit an iceberg and sank into the sea with over one thousand people on board. 3．When making a speech, you should raise your voice to attract your audience’s attention. 4．This library was built in memory of the scientist. 5．After the fire, very little remained of the house. 6．The headquaters decided to make a sudden attack on the enemy at daybreak. 巩固练习： 一、1~5. DBAAA　6~10.BCACA 二、BBDC　 三、1. then→when　 2. call→called　3. I →me　 4. √　　　5.many→ much　　　6.去掉was　　7. 去掉much　　 8.在eyes前加 the 或her　 9.are→ were　　　　 10. that→ what　 四、1. majored　2. remained　3. boarding　4. bombed　5. declared 11th Period 课堂反馈: 一、1. Republic　2. confuse　3. Fighting　4. influence　5. overthrown　6. Literature　 7. similar　8. route 二、 省略 巩固练习： 一、ABCDD　BBABA　DDCCA　AAAAA 二、DCBC 12th Period 课堂反馈: 一、CBCCD　DAADB　BADBA 巩固练习： 一、DACBA　CBDDA　BACBB　CDABC 二、ABDC　DACD